Dell n03 Printer User Manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Ê4ÀtÃsCË
2095849883
Order No. 6515 1298 13 Part No. 209 584 98 83 USA Edition A 2006
Operator’s Manual CLK-Class Cabriolet
Operator’s Manual
CLK-Class Cabriolet
CLK 350
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your
desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Cockpit................................................. 22
Instrument cluster ................................ 24
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26
Center console ..................................... 27
Upper part ...................................... 27
Lower part ...................................... 28
Overhead control panel ........................ 29
Door control panel................................ 30
Getting started...................................
Unlocking .............................................
Unlocking with the SmartKey .........
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*.........
Starter switch positions..................
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Easy-entry/exit feature...................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Parking brake .................................
Driving ............................................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off the engine.....................
Releasing seat belts........................
Locking ...........................................
31
32
32
33
34
37
37
41
42
43
45
45
48
50
51
52
53
53
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Air bags ..........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Active head restraints ....................
Roll bars .........................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear side
window operation...........................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP® ..............................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
61
62
63
69
73
74
75
85
86
86
86
87
87
88
89
92
92
92
94
Controls in detail ............................... 95
Locking and unlocking ......................... 96
SmartKey ....................................... 96
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 100
Opening the doors
from the inside............................. 107
Opening the trunk ........................ 108
Closing the trunk.......................... 110
Trunk emergency release ............. 115
Valet locking ................................ 116
Automatic central locking ............ 117
Locking and unlocking
from the inside............................. 118
Seats ................................................. 119
Front seat active head restraints . 119
Rear seat head restraints ............. 119
Multicontour seat*....................... 121
Seat heating*............................... 122
Seat ventilation* .......................... 123
Memory function ............................... 124
Storing positions into memory ..... 125
Recalling positions from memory. 125
Storing exterior rear view
mirror parking position................. 126
Lighting .............................................
Exterior lamp switch ....................
Combination switch .....................
Corner-illuminating front
fog lamps* (CLK with
Bi-Xenon* headlamps) .................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Door entry lamps .........................
Trunk lamp...................................
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature indicator.....
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator.....
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
NAV* menu..................................
Vehicle status
message memory menu...............
Settings menu..............................
127
127
131
132
133
134
135
135
136
136
137
137
138
138
139
140
140
142
144
145
146
146
148
Contents
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu* ...................................
Automatic transmission.....................
Gear selector lever position .........
Driving tips...................................
Gear ranges .................................
Automatic shift program ..............
Gear selector lever
one-touch gearshifting .................
Steering wheel gearshift
control one-touch gearshifting .....
Manual shift program
CLK 55 AMG ................................
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ......................
Good visibility ....................................
Headlamp cleaning system* ........
Rear view mirrors .........................
Sun visors ....................................
Rear window defroster .................
Climate control (CLK 350) .................
Deactivating the
climate control system.................
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode...........
Setting the temperature...............
161
163
166
168
170
171
172
173
174
178
180
181
181
181
184
185
186
189
189
190
Adjusting air distribution............... 190
Adjusting air volume ..................... 191
Front defroster.............................. 191
Air recirculation mode .................. 192
Air conditioning............................. 194
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents....................... 195
Automatic climate control
(CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)..................... 196
Deactivating the
automatic climate control system. 199
Operating the climate control system in
automatic mode............................ 199
Setting the temperature................ 200
Adjusting air distribution............... 200
Adjusting air volume ..................... 201
Front defroster.............................. 201
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 202
Air recirculation mode .................. 203
Charcoal filter ............................... 204
Air conditioning............................. 206
Residual heat and ventilation*
(Canada only)................................ 207
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents....................... 208
Audio system...................................... 209
Audio and telephone*, operation.. 209
Operating safety ........................... 209
Sound system* ............................. 209
Operating and display elements ... 210
Button and soft key operation ...... 212
Operation...................................... 212
Radio operation ............................ 217
Introduction to satellite radio*
(USA only)..................................... 222
CD mode....................................... 227
GSM network phones ................... 233
TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 240
Emergency calls “911” ................. 247
Power windows .................................. 249
Opening and
closing the windows ..................... 249
Synchronizing power windows...... 251
Summer opening feature .............. 252
Convenience closing feature......... 253
Opening and closing all side
windows with the soft top switch . 254
Soft top .............................................. 255
Opening and closing the soft top .. 255
Opening and closing the
soft top with the SmartKey ........... 260
Contents
Luggage cover ..............................
Wind screen .................................
Driving systems .................................
Cruise control...............................
Parktronic system
(Parking assist)*, Canada only .....
Loading ..............................................
Ski sack* (Canada only) ...............
Loading instructions.....................
Useful features ..................................
Storage compartments.................
Center armrest .............................
Armrest in the
rear passenger compartment .......
Cup holders..................................
Ashtrays .......................................
Cigarette lighter ...........................
Power outlet in the
rear passenger compartment .......
Floormats* ...................................
Telephone*...................................
Tele Aid ........................................
Garage door opener* ...................
262
263
265
265
269
273
273
277
278
278
281
283
283
284
286
287
287
288
289
296
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly – save fuel.............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes..........................................
Driving off ....................................
Parking.........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water.............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation
of radio transmitters ....................
Catalytic converter.......................
Emission control ..........................
Coolant temperature....................
305
306
307
307
307
307
307
308
310
310
311
311
312
312
313
314
314
315
315
316
316
317
At the gas station ..............................
Refueling......................................
Check regularly
and before a long trip...................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Coolant ........................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance...........
Direction of rotation.....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended
tire inflation pressure...................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
MOExtended system* ..................
Tire labeling .................................
Load identification .......................
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) .............................................
Maximum tire load .......................
318
318
320
321
321
322
326
327
328
329
330
330
331
333
333
339
341
345
345
349
350
351
Contents
Maximum tire inflation pressure ..
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles) .............
Tire ply material ...........................
Tire and loading terminology........
Rotating tires ...............................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Block heater (Canada only) ..........
Snow chains.................................
Maintenance......................................
Maintenance
service indicator message............
Clearing the maintenance
service indicator message............
Maintenance
service term exceeded.................
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator display...............
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator...........................
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........
352
353
354
355
358
359
359
360
360
361
361
362
362
362
363
364
364
Practical hints .................................. 373
What to do if …? ................................. 374
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 374
Lamp in center console................. 381
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display..................... 383
Where will I find...? ............................. 413
First aid kit.................................... 413
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 413
Minispare wheel............................ 416
Spare wheel bolts ......................... 418
Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 419
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 419
Locking the vehicle ....................... 420
Fuel filler flap ................................ 421
Manually unlocking
the gear selector lever .................. 422
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 423
Operating roll bars manually ......... 423
Soft top emergency operation ...... 425
Resetting activated head restraints.... 434
Resetting
activated head restraints .............. 434
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 435
SmartKey...................................... 436
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ....... 437
Replacing bulbs.................................. 438
Bulbs............................................. 438
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 440
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 443
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 444
Removing and installing
wiper blades ................................. 444
Flat tire............................................... 446
Preparing the vehicle .................... 446
Mounting the Minispare wheel...... 447
MOExtended system*................... 452
Battery ............................................... 453
Disconnecting the battery ............ 454
Removing the battery ................... 454
Charging and
reinstalling the battery.................. 455
Reconnecting the battery ............. 455
Jump starting...................................... 456
Contents
Towing the vehicle .............................
Towing the vehicle........................
Installing towing eye bolt..............
Fuses .................................................
Aids for replacing fuses................
Mainfuse box in passenger
compartment................................
Fuse box in engine compartment .
Fuse box in trunk..........................
458
458
460
462
462
463
463
464
Technical data .................................
Parts service......................................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet .....................
Identification labels ...........................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
CLK 350 .......................................
CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG.................
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires.............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Minispare wheel ...........................
Electrical system ...............................
Main dimensions and weights............
Main dimensions ..........................
Weights ........................................
465
466
467
467
468
469
469
469
470
471
473
475
476
477
478
478
478
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils ...................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements........................
Gasoline additives........................
Coolants ......................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
479
479
481
481
481
481
482
482
483
484
486
Technical terms............................... 487
Index................................................. 493
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will
be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Car Limited Warranty,
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty,
앫
Emission Performance Warranty,
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should be sent to us,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Customer Assistance Center,
One Mercedes Drive, Montvale,
NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
is in your own interest that we can contact
you should the need arise.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program Brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
12
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
In the USA:
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Getting started
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Practical hints
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
14
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your
vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks:
앫
앫
앫
ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
*
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your
vehicle.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
SIRIUS and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.
Warning!
컄
Page
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
indicate cross-references to
term definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made
may produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore
never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage to and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair
facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety
standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Cockpit
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Steering wheel gearshift
buttons
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Page
Item
9 Overhead control panel
175
176
앫
Turn signals
53
앫
Windshield wipers
53
앫
High beam
52
29
a Glove box
278
b Cup holder
283
c Center console
2 Combination switch
Page
d Hood lock release
27, 28
321
e Horn
f Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
41
3 Cruise control lever
265
g Parking brake pedal
50
4 Multifunction steering
wheel
26,
140
h Door control panel
30
5 Instrument cluster
24,
136
j Parking brake release
50
k Exterior lamp switch
52,
127
6 Lever for voice control
system*, see separate
operating instructions
7 Starter switch
8 Front Parktronic* warning
indicator (Canada only)
l Exterior rear view mirror adjustment
34
m Headlamp washer switch*
43
181
269
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1 L Left turn signal indicator lamp
2 v ESP® warning lamp
Page
53
378
3 Speedometer
4 Multifunction display
140
5 l Distance warning
lamp
Warning lamp without function. It illuminates with the ignition on. It should go out
when the engine is running.
6 K Right turn signal indicator lamp
53
7 Coolant temperature indicator with:
137
• Coolant temperature
warning lamp
377,
398
Item
8 Tachometer with:
Page
138
Item
a Clock with:
1 Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp
380,
409
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator
lamp
374
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
< Seat belt telltale
71,
379
B Low beam headlamp
indicator lamp
A High beam headlamp
indicator lamp
Page
153
375
ú Engine malfunction indicator lamp,
USA only
376
± Engine malfunction indicator lamp,
Canada only
376
131
131
C Roll bar warning lamp
b Fuel display with:
9 Main odometer with:
앫
Gear selector lever
position
140
앫
Program mode
140
A Fuel reserve warning
lamp
379
c Reset button for:
앫
Resetting trip odometer
136
앫
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
136
앫
Confirming new time settings
153
25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Multifunction display
Operating control system
Page
140
140
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
æ up / to increase
ç down / to decrease
j for next display
3 Telephone*:
Press button
26
Item
k for previous display
s to take a call
to dial a call
164
164
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call
164
Page
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
1 Seat heater*, driver’s side
Seat ventilation*, driver’s
side
122
123
2 Parktronic system* deactivation switch (Canada only)
272
3
ESP®
control switch
89
4 Hazard warning flasher
switch - switching on/off
133
5 Central unlocking switch
118
Central locking switch
Item
Page
8 Seat heater*,
passenger side
Seat ventilation*,
passenger side
122
9 Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp
81,
381
a Audio system,
145
123
or
118
COMAND* (see separate
operating instructions)
6 Switch for lowering rear
seat head restraints
120
b Climate control (CLK 350)
186
94
Automatic climate control
(CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
196,
7 Tow-away alarm switch
Anti-theft alarm system
indicator lamp
94
Rear window defroster
185
27
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
Page
284
286
35
3 Compartment in center
armrest (depending on vehicle production date):
Design A (illustrated in the
picture)
281
Design B
282
4 Soft top switch
256
5 Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission
앫
Automatic shift program
172
앫
Manual shift program
(CLK 55 AMG)
179
6 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
28
166
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
1 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
Page
289
2 Temperature sensor for automatic climate control
3 Right reading lamp on/off
135
4 Interior lighting control
134
5 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone*
288
6 Interior rear view mirror
43,
181
7 Garage door opener*
296
8 Left reading lamp on/off
135
29
At a glance
Door control panel
Item
1 Door handle
107
2 Seat adjustment
38,
119
3 Memory function (for storing seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel settings)
124
4 Switches for opening/closing front door windows
249
5 Rear window override
switch
85
6 Switches for opening/closing rear windows
249
7 Remote trunk opening
switch
109
Remote trunk
opening/closing* switch
30
Page
109
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
31
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page
references are located at the end of each
segment.
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 86)
왘
Press unlock button Πon the
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
왘
32
G
Enter the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
i
Opening a door causes the windows on
that side of the car to open slightly.
They will return to the up position when
the door is closed.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 96).
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using
the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch.
i
To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle, no further than approx. 3 feet
(1 meter) away from the door.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
왘
i
Opening a door causes the windows on
that side of the car to open slightly.
They will return to the up position when
the door is closed.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 100).
Pull an outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
system is disarmed.
왘
Enter the vehicle.
33
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
SmartKey
Starter switch
34
0 For removing SmartKey
The steering is locked when the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position. All
lamps (except low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 374).
3 Starting position.
i
When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except
low beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high beam headlamp indicator lamp,
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except low beam headlamp
indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) will go out when
the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are
operational.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
Getting started
Unlocking
!
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds
to turning the SmartKey to the various
starter positions.
앫
Check the battery and charge it if
necessary (컄 page 453).
앫
Get a jump start (컄 page 456).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch when the engine is
not in operation.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 96).
For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see “Starting with the
SmartKey” (컄 page 49).
If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the engine starts automatically.
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey.
i
The function of the SmartKey overrules
the KEYLESS-GO function.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the brake pedal.
35
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0
Ignition (or position 2)
i
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
왘
When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
on. The indicator and warning lamps
(except low beam headlamp indicator
lamp, high beam headlamp indicator
lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps if
activated) will go out when the engine
is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.
Position 1
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫
once again, the ignition (position 2)
is switched on.
앫
twice, the power supply is again
switched off.
36
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers. All the lamps (except low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
fails to come on when the ignition is
switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster”(컄 page 374).
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 100).
For information on starting the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 49).
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Warning!
Seats
Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 45).
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch, or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the power seats
can be operated when the respective door is
open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 75).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment
i
Seat height
The seat adjustment switches are located
on the respective door.
The memory function (컄 page 124) lets
you store the settings for the seat position together with the settings for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
왘
Seat cushion tilt
왘
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Backrest tilt
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
or
왘
Open the respective door.
38
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach
the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
The position should be as far to the rear
as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
!
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
Press switch up or down in direction of
arrow 2.
Press switch up or down in direction of
arrow 3 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 5 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
Head restraint height
왘
Press switch up or down in direction of
arrow 1.
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as
possible.
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
Head restraint adjusting
Folding front seat backrests forward
Manually adjust the head restraint.
1 Release lever
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
왘
Push or pull the head restraint cushion
to the desired position.
i
Folding backrests forward
왘
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as
possible.
For more information, see “Seats”
(컄 page 119).
Pull release lever 1 forward and fold
the seat backrest forward.
The head restraint will automatically
move down.
Folding backrests back
왘
Fold and press the backrest rearward
until it engages in driving position.
The head restraint returns to its previous position.
컄컄
39
Getting started
Adjusting
컄컄
i
In addition to the front seat backrests,
the front seat cushions can also be
shifted forward to permit easy access
to the rear whenever the seat is located
in the rear half of its adjustment range.
Pivot backrest forward by pulling the
release lever until the seat moves in a
combined forward and upward
movement.
Warning!
The seat belts provide protection only with
the backrest locked in place. Therefore, the
backrest must be locked in place with the
vehicle in motion. Do not drive the vehicle
when the backrest is not locked in place.
If the warning message:
Lock front
passenger seat
!
or
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
Lock driver’s
seat
40
G
is displayed in the multifunction display,
then the respective backrest is not engaged
in its lock. Carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is in a safe distance from the roadway. Always provide sufficient room behind the backrest and fold
the backrest all the way back until it locks in
place.
The warning message is no longer displayed
as soon as the backrest is locked in place. If
both backrests are locked in place and the
warning message is still displayed, have the
system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Never place hands under seat or near any
moving parts during a seat adjustment procedure.
For information on additional convenience
features permitting easy entry and exit,
see “Easy-entry/exit feature” (컄 page 42).
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
Steering wheel adjustment
Adjusting steering column in or out
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the lower left of steering
column.
왘
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch, or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the steering
wheel adjustment feature can be operated
when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Move stalk forward or back in direction
of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your
arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Move stalk up or down in direction of
arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and all the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the
instrument cluster are clearly visible.
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
or
왘
Open the driver’s door.
i
The memory function (컄 page 124) lets
you store settings for the steering
wheel together with the settings for the
exterior rear view mirrors and the seat
position.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in
its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
activated or deactivated in the
Convenience submenu of the control
system (컄 page 160).
Warning!
G
You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following:
앫
Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 41).
앫
Press the memory position switch
(컄 page 124).
42
i
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver's door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
The last set steering wheel position is
stored when
앫
the ignition is switched off.
앫
the position is stored in memory
(컄 page 125).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you:
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you:
앫
앫
close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on,
or
or
앫
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (컄 page 35) once
with the driver’s door closed.
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch,
앫
open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 35) in position 1.
Getting started
Adjusting
i
Mirrors
If the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position,
the steering wheel will no longer be
able to move upward when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Repositioning of the steering wheel:
앫
앫
will be halted briefly when you start
the vehicle.
will stop if you start the vehicle and
set off immediately.
Warning!
G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Warning!
Interior rear view mirror
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
왘
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 181).
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
컄컄
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
컄컄 The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
i
왘
Press button 3 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left, or right, according to the desired
setting.
The memory function (컄 page 124) lets
you store the setting for the exterior
rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering wheel and seat
position.
!
1 Adjustment button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
44
If an exterior rear view mirror was
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front), reposition it by
applying firm pressure until it snaps
into place. The mirror housing is now
properly positioned and you can adjust
the mirror normally.
i
At low ambient temperatures, the
exterior rear view mirrors will be
heated automatically.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 181).
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning!
G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they where designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 62).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats.
Regardless of seating position, children
12 years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 75).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
45
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning!
G
The seat belt presenter slides out when the
corresponding door is closed and the ignition is switched on (컄 page 34).
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 66).
The seat belt presenter for driver and passenger makes it easier to put on the seat
belt.
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
46
Warning!
1 Seat belt presenter
1 Latch plate
2 Release button
3 Buckle
왘
With a smooth motion, pull the belt out
of the seat belt presenter.
Getting started
Driving
왘
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
앫
왘
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly
upright position.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a
person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫
Check your seat belt periodically
during travel to make sure that it is
properly positioned.
앫
Make sure that the seat belt is always
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
Warning!
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
47
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine
The seat belt presenter slides back:
앫
right after you pushed the latch
plate 1 into buckle 3 and heard it
click.
앫
after approximately 60 seconds if you
did not push latch plate 1 into
buckle 3.
앫
if your door is opened.
앫
if you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0.
앫
if you release a front seat backrest and
fold it forward.
Warning!
G
The seat belt presenter must be retracted
while the vehicle is in motion. Only when the
seat belt presenter is retracted can the seat
belt be properly positioned on the body and
protect the occupant as intended.
48
Warning!
Automatic transmission
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 166).
Getting started
Driving
Starting with the SmartKey
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress accelerator.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 (컄 page 34) and release it
again immediately (“touch-start”).
The engine then starts automatically.
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see (컄 page 58).
왘
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!
G
Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle.
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress accelerator.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 59).
49
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 48).
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 456).
50
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Parking brake
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
왘
Release the parking brake by pulling on
release handle 1.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the clock
goes out.
Getting started
Driving
Driving
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
왘
Move gear selector lever to
position D or R.
i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic
locking using the control system
(컄 page 159).
!
Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the
brake reduces engine performance and
causes premature brake and drivetrain
wear.
!
If you hear a warning signal and the
message Release parking brake appears in the multifunction display when
driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
!
Place the gear selector lever in
position R or P only when the vehicle is
stopped in order to avoid damaging the
transmission.
Release the parking brake.
51
Getting started
Driving
!
Switching on headlamps
Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 127).
Warning!
G
Low beam headlamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamp indicator
lamp B in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 24).
High beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Exterior lamp switch
For more information on driving, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 307).
52
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Getting started
Driving
왘
Push combination switch in direction of
arrow 1.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 24).
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
왘
Press combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes (컄 page 24).
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements.
i
To signal minor directional changes
such as changing lanes, press combination switch only to the point of resistance and release. The corresponding
turn signals will flash three times.
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
53
Getting started
Driving
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry. Dust that
accumulates on a windshield might
scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a
dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry
weather conditions, always operate the
windshield wipers with windshield
washer fluid (컄 page 55).
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the
intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
i
Intermittent wiping
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a door
is opened. This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or
during windshield cleaning. Windshield
wipers will operate in the presence of
water sprayed on the windshield, and
windshield wipers may be damaged as
a result.
Intermittent wiping will be continued
when
앫
and
앫
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent
on wetness of windshield.
왘
the gear selector lever is in position
D or R
or
Turn the combination switch to
position I.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
all doors are closed
앫
the wiper setting is changed using
the combination switch
Single wipe
왘
Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
54
Getting started
Driving
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
!
앫
Remove blockage.
왘
Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 past the resistance
point.
If anything blocks the windshield
wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch
them off immediately.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
앫
i
To prevent smears on the windshield,
wipe with windshield washer fluid every
now and then even when it is raining.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 329).
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle
in a safe location and,
앫
remove SmartKey from starter
switch
or
앫
turn off the engine by pressing
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the driver’s
door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey
removed from starter switch)
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in combination switch position I,
앫
set the combination switch to the
next higher wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
55
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The coolant temperature is
above 248°F (120°C)
The engine runs erratically and misfires
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
If no damage can be determined on the
56
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.
왘
Check the coolant level and add
coolant if necessary (컄 page 327).
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows:
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning!
G
Parking brake
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
왘
Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the
warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will be illuminated.
57
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning!
G
Turning off the engine
왘
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the curb.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 168).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Turning off the engine with the
SmartKey
왘
Switching off headlamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 52).
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 127).
58
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
(컄 page 34) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to shut off the engine.
With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄 page 34).
!
If you hear a warning signal you have
either tried to turn off the engine while
the gear selector lever is not in P.
Place the gear selector lever in P.
Releasing seat belts
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 46).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
!
Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so
that the seat belt and/or latch plate
cannot get caught or pinched in the
door or in the seat mechanism. This
can damage the seat belt and impair
the effectiveness of the seat belt,
and/or cause damage to the door
and/or door trim panel. Such damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limit Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Locking
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
59
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘
i
Opening a door causes the windows on
that side of the car to open slightly.
They will return to the up position when
the door is closed.
A warning sounds and the message
Turn off lamps appears in the multifunction display if the vehicle’s exterior
lamps are not switched off
앫
앫
with the SmartKey removed from
the starter switch and the driver’s
door open
with the engine turned off using the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
and the driver’s door open (same as
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
Switch off the exterior lamps.
60
Locking with KEYLESS-GO*
Locking with the SmartKey
왘
i
Exit the vehicle, take the SmartKey or
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with
you, and close all doors and the trunk
lid.
Press lock button ‹ on the
SmartKey (컄 page 32).
With the trunk and both doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 96).
1 Lock button
왘
Press lock button 1 on an outside
door handle or on the trunk lid
(컄 page 106).
With the trunk and both doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 100).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 69)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 75)
앫
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH) (컄 page 83)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with
앫
Air bags (컄 page 63)
앫
Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors)
앫
Emergency tensioning device (ETD) for
seat belts (컄 page 72)
62
Air bag system components with
앫
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (컄 page 81)
앫
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 78)
As independent systems, their protective
functions work in conjunction with each
other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 75).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a
few seconds after the engine has been
started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
fails to go out after approximately four
seconds after the engine was started
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not deploy when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
Warning!
G
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags) or side impacts
(head-thorax air bags and rear side impact
air bags*). However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and
fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
앫
Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver’s front air bag inflates.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫
64
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door or the rear
side trim panel where the head-thorax
air bag and/or the rear side impact air
bag* inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag
be triggered. Always sit nearly upright,
properly use the seat belts and use an
appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
It should be noted that with respect to both
head-thorax air bags and rear side impact air
bags* there is a possibility for a head-thorax
or rear side impact air bag* related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a
head-thorax air bag or a rear side impact air
bag* which needs to deploy rapidly in a side
impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door or the rear
side trim panel where the head-thorax
air bag and/or the rear side impact air
bag* inflates.
This could result in serious injuries or
death should the head-thorax air bag
and/or the rear side impact air bag* be
deployed.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years
old and under, use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size
and weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted side impact air bags* deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an
additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
i
Air bags are designed to deploy only in
certain frontal impacts (front air bags),
and in side impacts (head-thorax air
bags and rear side impact air bags*)
which exceed preset thresholds. Only
during these events will they provide
their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The
driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly
fastened seat belt is also needed to
provide the best possible protection in
a rollover.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of
your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure that the
vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
air bag
Warning!
앫
66
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that is deployed must be replaced.
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
앫
앫
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or
removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, seat covers, badges, etc. over
the steering wheel hub, front passenger
front air bag cover, outboard sides of the
front seat backrests, door frame trims,
or rear side trim panels, and installation
of additional electrical/electronic
equipment on or near SRS components
and wiring. Keep area between air bags
and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other more significant injuries resulting
from air bag deployment.
Warning!
Front air bags
The front air bags in this vehicle have
been designed to inflate in two stages.
This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation that are based on the
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
assessed by the air bag control unit.
G
Only use seat covers which have been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
may interfere with or prevent the
deployment of the head-thorax air bags.
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
i
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag
Driver and front passenger front air bags
are deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the head-thorax air
bags and/or rear side impact air bags*
On the front passenger side, the front
air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 78).
The lighter the front passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second
stage inflation of the air bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The front passenger front air bag will only
be deployed if:
The head-thorax air bags 1 in the drivers
and front passenger seat are deployed:
앫
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front air bags
the system, based on OCS weight sensor readings, senses that the front passenger seat is occupied
앫
the 56 indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit (컄 page 81)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
The head-thorax air bags 1 are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the
system’s deployment threshold.
Head-thorax air bags
Warning!
G
Only use seat covers which have been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
may interfere with or prevent the
deployment of the head-thorax air bags.
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
1 Head-thorax air bag
68
Rear side impact air bags*
1 Rear side impact air bag*
The rear side impact air bags* 1 are
deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front air bags
The rear side impact air bags* 1 are not
deployed in impacts which do not exceed
the system’s deployment threshold.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Seat belts
Warning!
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in
motion.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄 page 45).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 75).
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
correctly restrained with a separate seat
belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
70
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
앫
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
앫
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger front air bag, head-thorax air
bags and rear side impact air bags*),
ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. The
system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
and ETD) and side (head-thorax air bags
and rear side impact air bags* and ETD)
impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds.
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
of the ETDs or to failure.
G
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
앫
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in
booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started the seat belt
telltale < illuminates for a maximum of
six seconds and a warning chime sounds
to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If after these six seconds, the driver’s or
the front passenger’s seat belt (with the
front passenger seat occupied) are not fastened with all doors closed,
앫
앫
and the vehicle speed does not exceed
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as
long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened.
and the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h), the seat belt telltale <
starts flashing and a warning chime
sounds with increasing intensity until
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt are fastened, or for a maximum of 60 seconds from the time the
vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph
(25 km/h) if either the driver’s or front
passenger’s seat belt remains unfastened.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the seat belt telltale < stops
flashing and the warning chime stops
sounding. The seat belt telltale <
then continues to be illuminated for as
long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt are not fastened.
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver and front passenger’s
seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information on the seat belt
telltale <, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 379).
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force
limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts
exceeding a preset severity level
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly,
see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 62)
!
The ETDs for the front seats will only
activate if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate properly inserted
into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear seats will activate
with or without the respective seat
belts fastened.
72
In an impact, emergency tensioning
devices remove slack from the belts. Belt
force limiters reduce the force exerted by
the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Active head restraints
Warning!
The active head restraints are intended to
offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from head and neck injury. In the event of a rear-end collision,
the active head restraints on the driver’s
and front passenger’s seats are designed
to move forward in the direction of travel,
providing the head with increased support
earlier on in the collision sequence. The active head restraints move forward whether
the seat is occupied or not.
Warning!
G
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
You cannot remove the active head restraint on the driver’s and passenger’s
seats.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 37).
For information on resetting the activated
active head restraints, see “Resetting activated head restraints” (컄 page 434).
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints. Contact your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Roll bars
Warning!
G
Make sure nothing is blocking the roll bars’
path of motion. Otherwise someone could
be injured when the roll bars are raised. The
head restraints should therefore always be
in the raised position when the rear seat is
occupied (컄 page 120).
The roll bars are integrated into the rear
head restraints.
The roll bars raise automatically in an accident or in a critical driving situation.
i
When the roll bars are raised automatically, you will hear a ratcheting sound
and the rear head restraints will also
rise.
74
You can manually lower the roll bars again
when the soft top is open (컄 page 424).
With the soft top closed, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the
roll bars lowered. Do not attempt to lower
the roll bars manually with the soft top
closed. Lowering the roll bars manually
with the soft top closed may impair the
function of the roll bars.
i
You cannot lower the rear head
restraints with the rear head restraint
lowering switch (컄 page 120) when the
roll bars are in the raised position.
Also, you cannot operate the soft top
using the soft top switch when the roll
bars are in the raised position.
앫
If the soft top is open, you can manually lower the roll bars
(컄 page 424).
앫
If the soft top is closed, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
to have the roll bars lowered.
Warning!
G
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in
the clock does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then
the roll bar system is not operating properly
and may not activate in an accident. In this
case, raise the roll bars manually before
continuing to drive (컄 page 423).
For safety reasons, drive only with the roll
bars raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
Infant and child restraint systems
!
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all Canadian provinces.
앫
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
Make sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and
information on choosing an appropriate
restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual
manner.
i
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, properly secured by a
lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
lap shoulder belt and a child restraint
lower anchorage system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
For information on LATCH-type child
seat anchors (컄 page 83).
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
!
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant, or toddler restraint, or booster seat, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and
to infant or child restraints.
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt or seat
belt and lower anchors, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
76
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the OCS senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured or even killed if the
front passenger front air bag inflates in
a collision which could occur under
some circumstances, even with the air
bag technology installed in your vehicle.
The only means to completely eliminate
this risk is to never place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat. We therefore strongly recommend
that you always place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the back
seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the
56 indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicating that the front passenger front
air bag is deactivated. Should the
56 indicator lamp not illuminate
or go out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the 56 indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the
56 indicator lamp is illuminated.
If the 56 indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and
secure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be
activated (컄 page 79).
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
컄컄
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised
children in a child restraint system may use
vehicle equipment and may cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined
by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
i
The system does not deactivate the
head-thorax air bag and the emergency
tensioning device.
78
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
nearly upright position with their back
against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the
occupant's weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
able to properly approximate the
occupant’s weight category.
i
If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in
any way, take the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both driver and the front passenger should
always use the 56 indicator lamp
as an indication of whether or not the front
passenger is properly positioned.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a
small individual is in the front passenger
seat, have the front passenger re-position
himself or herself in the seat until the
56 indicator lamp goes out.
More information about air bag display
messages (컄 page 389).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS classified
the front passenger seat occupant as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 56 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the
56 indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the 56 indicator lamp will illuminate
for approximately six seconds when the
engine is started and then, depending on
occupant weight sensor readings from the
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the
56 indicator lamp illuminated, the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
With the 56 indicator lamp out, the
front passenger front air bag is activated.
If the 56 indicator lamp is
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
56 indicator lamp will illuminate for
approximately six seconds when the engine
is started and then go out, indicating that
the front passenger front air bag is
activated.
앫
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫
front passenger's weight category as
identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS).
If the 56 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the head-thorax air
bags and/or rear side impact air bags*.
If the front passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by:
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, or seat
belt and lower anchors, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
80
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured or even killed if the
front passenger front air bag inflates in
a collision which could occur under
some circumstances, even with the air
bag technology installed in your vehicle.
The only means to completely eliminate
this risk is to never place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat. We therefore strongly recommend
that you always place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the back
seat.
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the
56 indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicating that the front passenger front
air bag is deactivated. Should the
56 indicator lamp not illuminate
or go out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the 56 indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the
56 indicator lamp is illuminated.
If the 56 indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and
secure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be
activated (컄 page 79).
i
Deployment of the driver front air bag
does not mean that the front passenger
front air bag also should have deployed.
standard child restraint - both
instances where the system suppresses deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even
though the impact met the criteria
and was of sufficient severity to
deploy the driver front air bag.
앫
that the seat was occupied by a
small individual (such as a young
teenager or a small adult) or a child
weighing more than the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint - instances
where the system may suppress
deployment of the front passenger
front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of
sufficient severity to deploy the
driver front air bag.
The 56 indicator lamp is located in
the center console.
1 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
The 56 indicator lamp 1 will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed or in starter switch position 0.
The Occupant Classification System
(컄 page 78) may have determined:
앫
that the seat was empty or
occupied by the weight up to or less
than that of a typical 12-month-old
child seated in a
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
56 indicator lamp are lit at the same
time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant
Classification System. The front passenger
front air bag will be deactivated in this case.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
앫
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
82
앫
Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Self-test Occupant Classification
System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 56 indicator lamp
located in the center console illuminates. If
an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
front passenger seat and the system
senses the occupant as being an adult,
the 56 indicator lamp will
illuminate and go out after approximately
six seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 56 indicator lamp will
illuminate and not go out.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp should not
illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 381).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a LATCH-type child seat
with matching mounting fittings.
Depending on vehicle production date,
your vehicle is equipped with either
LATCH-type design A or B.
i
Your cabriolet does not have and is not
required to have anchorage rings for a
child seat’s top tether strap in the rear
seating positions. Child seats can be
used with the seat belt, or lower anchor
system and seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Warning!
G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts.
Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children from
41 lbs until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
i
The child seat must be firmly attached
in the right and left side anchor 2.
i
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system (컄 page 69).
Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchor 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat anchor fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
LATCH-type anchors design A
The foldable LATCH-type anchors are
located between the seat cushion and the
backrest.
Warning!
G
Before installing the child seat, make sure
anchors 2 are folded out and locked in
place.
왘
LATCH-type anchors design B
The LATCH-type anchors are non-foldable
and located between the seat cushion and
the backrest.
Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
i
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchors
3 Release button
To fold anchors out:
왘
Grip inner side of anchors 2 and fold
forward until they audibly lock in place.
84
If a child seat is not installed, the
LATCH-type anchors can be folded
back between the seat cushion and the
seat backrest.
To fold anchors back:
왘
Press down button 3 on each
anchor 2 and return the anchor 2 to
its catch.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchors
왘
Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear side window operation
Warning!
You can block the rear side window
operation (for instance when you have
children riding in the rear passenger
compartment).
The override switch is located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door.
G
왘
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
1 Deactivating override switch
2 Activating override switch
3 Override switch
Activating override switch
Slide override switch 3 to the right in
direction 2.
The rear side windows can no longer be
operated using the respective switch
located in the rear trim panels.
i
Operation of the rear side windows
with the switches located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door is still
possible.
Deactivating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 3 to the left in
direction 1.
The rear side windows can be operated
using the respective switch located in
the rear trim panels.
For more information, see “Power windows” (컄 page 249).
85
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
21/2 minutes.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Activating
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Deactivating
i
1 Â button
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
86
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
왘
왘
Press and hold button 1 for at least
one second.
Press button 1 again.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter
switch.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 35).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be inside the vehicle.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫
앫
Warning!
G
ABS
G
Warning!
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, and
the ESP® is only achieved with winter
tires (컄 page 359) or snow chains as
required.
The ABS, BAS, and ESP® cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
87
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Braking
Emergency brake maneuver
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
왘
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the
pulsation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions
and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
BAS
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 373).
88
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 373).
ESP®
Warning!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
and by limiting the engine output, the ESP®
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
especially useful while driving off and on
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
maneuvers.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
engaged.
G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as
follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease upon the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
The warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the
ignition. It goes out when the engine is
running.
89
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Switching off the ESP®
!
Because of the ESP®’s automatic
operation, the engine must be shut off
when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised
The ESP® will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 373).
G
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
i
90
Warning!
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare or collapsible tire is mounted.
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫
when driving with snow chains
앫
in deep snow
앫
in sand or gravel
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
!
®
Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
The switch is located on the center console.
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫
the traction control will still brake a
spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
i
When the ESP® is switched off and one
or more drive wheels are spinning, the
ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes. However, the
ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle.
G
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off.
When you switch off the ESP®
앫
Warning!
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP®
switched off. This may cause serious
damage to the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
1 ESP® switch (off/on)
왘
Press switch 1.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is deactivated.
Switching on the ESP®
왘
Press switch 1 again.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with ESP® switched on.
91
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
i
Starting the engine will also deactivate
the immobilizer.
Activating
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
With the SmartKey
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
왘
Turn off the engine by means of the
start/stop button (컄 page 35) on the
gear selector lever.
Open the driver’s door.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
Deactivating
With the SmartKey
앫
a door
왘
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood.
92
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
앫
the vehicle is opened with the
mechanical key.
앫
someone opens a door from the inside.
앫
someone opens the trunk with the
emergency release button.
i
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system (컄 page 289) provided
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system
i
Canceling the alarm
The indicator lamp is in the switch for the
tow-away alarm in the center console.
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following
elements may not be properly closed:
With the SmartKey
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
Disarming the alarm system
왘
1 Indicator lamp
왘
Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the alarm system is
activated. Indicator lamp 1 begins to
flash after approximately 30 seconds
after arming the alarm system.
Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is
disarmed.
i
The alarm system will rearm automatically after approximately 40 seconds if
neither a door nor the trunk lid was
opened.
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
93
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is
triggered, for example, if the vehicle is
lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system (컄 page 289) provided
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
i
When you unlock the vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms
automatically. The tow-away alarm
remains disarmed until you lock the
vehicle again.
Disarming tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
switch off the tow-away alarm feature
before towing the vehicle, or when parking
on a surface subject to movement, such as
a ferry or auto train.
Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*.
The tow-away alarm is automatically
armed after about 30 seconds.
94
Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
while the ignition is switched on.
왘
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 in switch 1 comes
on briefly.
왘
Exit and lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button on each
outside door handle or trunk.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed
until you lock the vehicle again.
Arming tow-away alarm
왘
왘
1 Tow-away alarm off switch
2 Indicator lamp
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control (CLK 350)
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Audio system
Power windows
Soft top
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will
be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
For more information on locking and
unlocking, see “Getting started”
(컄 page 32) and (컄 page 57).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are a
different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
96
앫
the doors
앫
the glove box
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 86)
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
i
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
You can also open and close the soft
top, see “Opening and closing the soft
top with the SmartKey” (컄 page 260),
and the power windows using the
SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 252) and see “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 253).
97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘
Global locking
왘
With the trunk and both doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if:
앫
neither a door nor the trunk is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫
the central locking switch is not
activated
Press button ‹.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Press button Πonce.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
Selective setting
Global unlocking
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Press button Πtwice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
With the trunk and both doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
98
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫
앫
앫
앫
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Checking the batteries
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 comes on
briefly to indicate that the SmartKey
batteries are in order.
!
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey (컄 page 99) and replace
them if necessary (컄 page 435).
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door (컄 page 419) and
the trunk (컄 page 420).
Replace the batteries (컄 page 435).
Use the mechanical key to lock the
driver’s door (컄 page 420) and the
trunk (컄 page 116).
Have the vehicle battery and the
battery connections checked
(컄 page 453).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
If the batteries are checked within
signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the ‹ or Œ button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Unlocking and opening the trunk
You can unlock and open the trunk
separately.
A minimum height clearance of 5.41 ft
(1.65 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
왘
Press and hold button Š until trunk
unlocks and begins to open.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid
stops moving.
i
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 116).
The trunk can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 115).
99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a
replacement.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you pull an outside
door handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
100
앫
the doors
앫
the glove box
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 86)
i
When the passenger outside door handle is pulled, the vehicle is centrally unlocked.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
You can also open and close the soft
top and the power windows using the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, see
“Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 252) and see “Convenience
closing feature” (컄 page 253).
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO*
앫
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 96).
앫
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the ‹ button).
앫
앫
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-Go must be
located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
trunk lid.
앫
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫
앫
electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil.
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
102
앫
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫
All doors must be closed.
앫
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 35), you can only turn it off
again with this button, even if you have
put the SmartKey in the starter switch
in the meantime.
앫
This does not apply if, after starting, the
gear selector lever is still in position P.
and the SmartKey is then inserted in
the starter switch. The SmartKey will
then have priority over the
KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s
electrical system will operate according to the position of the SmartKey in
the starter switch, even stopping the
engine.
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
The vehicle then cannot be locked or
the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle while the ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger
exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO), the message
Key not recognized
will appear in the multifunction display
while driving off.
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
앫
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message
Key recognized in vehicle
will appear in the multifunction display.
Factory setting
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Global unlocking
왘
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫
neither a door nor the trunk is opened.
앫
the central locking switch is not
activated.
i
The vehicle could inadvertently be
unlocked if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the
vehicle and:
앫
an outside door handle is splashed
with water, or
앫
you attempt to clean an outside
door handle.
Pull an outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
i
If the vehicle has been parked for a
longer period of time, you must pull an
outside door handle in order to activate
the KEYLESS-GO function.
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking
Selective setting
Global unlocking
왘
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you, pull the driver’s
door handle only the driver’s door and the
fuel filler flap unlocks.
왘
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 60) or the trunk
lid (컄 page 106).
With the trunk and both doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then
function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Pull the driver’s outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
104
Pull the outside door handle on the passenger side.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
Global locking
왘
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle.
With the trunk and both doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i
You can also lock the vehicle using the
lock button on the trunk lid,
(컄 page 106) or, vehicles with trunk
opening/closing*, KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch (컄 page 114).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Restoring to factory setting
왘
앫
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
malfunctioning, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, then the batteries in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the
vehicle battery is drained.
앫
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(컄 page 105) and replace them if
necessary (컄 page 435).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door (컄 page 419) and
the trunk (컄 page 420).
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock the
driver’s door (컄 page 420) and the
trunk (컄 page 116).
Have the vehicle battery and the
battery connections checked
(컄 page 453).
Checking the batteries
왘
i
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the ‹ or Œ button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Global locking using the lock button on
the trunk lid
Press button ‹ or Œ.
i
Battery check lamp 5 comes on
briefly to indicate that the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order.
To prevent a possible inadvertent
lockout, the trunk will open
automatically if a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is recognized inside the
vehicle or in the trunk.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries
are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 435).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking and opening the trunk
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
You can unlock and open the trunk separately.
If you lose your SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following:
A minimum height clearance of 5.41 ft
(1.65 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
왘
Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key
immediately to your car insurance
company.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
왘
Press and hold button Š until trunk
unlocks and begins to open.
!
1 Lock button
왘
Press lock button 1 on the trunk lid.
With the trunk and both doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid
stops moving.
i
i
You can also lock the vehicle using the
lock button on an outside door handle
(컄 page 60) or, vehicles with trunk
opening/closing system*,
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
(컄 page 114).
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 116).
106
The trunk can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 115).
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a
replacement.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open doors only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
If you open a door, the side windows on
that side of the vehicle will lower slightly. The windows close again when you
close the door.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫
Press button ‹ or Œ on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
Pull an outside door handle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 35).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be inside the vehicle.
107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk
The handle is located in the rear license
plate recess.
Opening the trunk from outside
A minimum height clearance of 5.41 ft
(1.65 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: To stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*:
The vehicle must be unlocked.
i
1 Handle
왘
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 116).
Pull on handle 1.
The trunk opens.
i
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* or from
its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk
emergency release” (컄 page 115).
108
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk from the inside
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
The remote trunk opening switch and the
trunk closing switch are located on the
driver’s door (vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*).
A minimum height clearance of 5.41 ft
(1.65 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: To stop the opening procedure, press switch 1 or 2.
The remote trunk opening switch is located on the driver’s door (vehicles without
trunk opening/closing system*).
i
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 116).
1 Remote trunk opening switch*
2 Remote trunk closing switch*
왘
1 Remote trunk opening switch
Press remote trunk opening switch 1
until the trunk begins to open.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp
comes on and remains lit until the
trunk is closed.
i
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* or from
its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk
emergency release” (컄 page 115).
109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk
Warning!
Closing the trunk from the inside
automatically*
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk from the inside using the remote trunk closing*
switch.
왘
Press the remote trunk closing*
switch 2 (컄 page 109) until the indicator lamp in the switch goes out and
the trunk lid is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release remote trunk closing*
switch 2.
i
You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 111).
110
G
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
the door mounted remote trunk closing*
switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to ensure that no one is in danger of being injured.
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk closing
switch.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), in the sequence, the
upper motion the closing procedure is
stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the remote trunk opening/closing* switch
can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
manually
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
1 Handle
2 Handles
왘
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1 or handles 2.
왘
Close trunk from the outside with
hands placed flat on the trunk lid.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning!
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it (컄 page 110). All turn
signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking.
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicle with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
Warning!
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
G
Warning!
1 Trunk closing switch
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
왘
앫
press trunk closing switch 1
앫
press the Š button on the SmartKey
앫
press the remote trunk opening or closing switch (on driver’s door)
Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
i
You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 111).
112
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the trunk closing switch can
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it (컄 page 110). All turn
signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately.
i
You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 111).
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
i
1 Trunk closing switch
왘
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫
press trunk closing switch 1
앫
press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch
앫
press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
앫
press the remote trunk opening or clos컄컄
ing switch (on driver’s door)
The trunk closes.
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
컄컄
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the trunk closing
switch can be operated. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning!
Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the
trunk lid and lock the vehicle simultaneously.
G
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it (컄 page 110). All turn
signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking.
114
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
The vehicle is locked and the trunk
closes automatically.
With both doors closed, all turn signal
lamps flash three times to confirm
locking. The locking knobs in the doors
move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
i
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i
왘
You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 111).
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫
press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch 1
앫
press trunk closing switch
앫
press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
앫
press the remote trunk opening or closing switch (on driver’s door)
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the trunk closing
switch can be operated. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning!
Trunk emergency release
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
The emergency release button is located
on the inside of the trunk lid.
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
1 Emergency release button
왘
Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
The trunk unlocks and opens slightly.
왘
Push up the trunk lid to fully open.
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i
i
The emergency release button unlocks
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
standing still or in motion.
If the vehicle has previously been
locked using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*, opening the trunk from
the inside using the emergency release
button will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
Valet locking
앫
The button will flash for 30 minutes
after opening the trunk.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
앫
The button will flash for 60 minutes
after closing the trunk.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫
Press button ‹ or Œ on the
SmartKey.
i
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk if the vehicle battery
is discharged or disconnected.
앫
The lock is located next to the handle
above the rear license plate recess.
Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 35).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
must be inside the vehicle.
116
To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet
park the vehicle, lock it separately with
the mechanical key. Leave only the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key
with the vehicle.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
i
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 116).
i
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Close the trunk (컄 page 110).
i
왘
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 419).
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the
mechanical key.
왘
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical key in that position to lock the
trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
왘
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to neutral position 1 and remove
the mechanical key in that position to
unlock the trunk.
You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 108).
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact
exceeds a preset threshold.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic
central locking when the vehicle
앫
is pushed or towed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system, see “Setting automatic locking” (컄 page 159).
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The switches are located in the center
console.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch 1
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking
or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for
example, if you want to lock the vehicle
before starting to drive.
You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap
with the central locking or unlocking
switch.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
118
앫
while in the selective remote
control mode, only the door opened
from inside is unlocked.
앫
while in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is
unlocked when a door is opened
from the inside.
Locking
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
왘
If both doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
not unlock using the central unlocking
switch 2.
Press central locking switch 1.
Unlocking
왘
Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see
“Adjusting” (컄 page 37).
Front seat active head restraints
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
You cannot remove the active head restraints on the driver’s and passenger’s
seats.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as
possible.
Rear seat head restraints
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the raised position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
lowering/raising operation of the head
restraints.
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 37)
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 73).
119
Controls in detail
Seats
Raising rear head restraints
Lowering rear head restraints with
switch in the center console
i
The rear head restraints cannot be lowered using the switch 1 when the roll
bars have been released. The roll bars
need to be lowered before the rear
head restraints can be operated again
using switch 1.
앫
If the roll bars have released and
the soft top is closed, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
to have the roll bars lowered. Do
not attempt to lower the roll bars
manually with the soft top closed.
Lowering the roll bars manually
with the soft top closed may impair
the function of the roll bars.
앫
If the roll bars have released and
the soft top is open, you can lower
the roll bars manually (컄 page 424)
or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the
roll bars lowered.
1 Rear seat head restraint
왘
Pull head restraint 1 to its highest
position.
1 Rear head restraint lowering switch
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
왘
Push the rear head restraints lowering
switch 1.
The rear head restraints are lowered.
120
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat cushion depth
Multicontour seat*
왘
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be
continuously varied with switches on the
side of the seat after switching on ignition.
Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 1.
Backrest contour
왘
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using switches 2
and 3.
Backrest side bolsters
왘
Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.
121
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
Both switches for the front seats are
located in the center console.
The red indicator lamps on the switch 1
show which heating level you have selected.
왘
2
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
1
왘
Continue pressing seat heating
switch 1 until desired seat heating
level is reached.
Switching off seat heating
Two indicator lamps on.
왘
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
After approximately 20 minutes,
seat heating is automatically
switched off.
off
왘
After approximately five minutes,
seat heating is automatically
switched to level 2.
After approximately ten minutes,
seat heating is automatically
switched to level 1.
1 Seat heating switch
Press seat heating switch 1 once.
Three red indicator lamps in the switch
come on.
Level
3
122
Switching on seat heating
No indicator lamp on.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
Press seat heating switch 1
repeatedly until all red indicator lamps
go out.
i
If one or more of the indicator lamps on
the seat heater switch 1 are flashing,
there is insufficient voltage due to too
many electrical consumers being
switched on. The seat heating switches
off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as
sufficient voltage is available.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
Both switches for the front seats are
located in the center console.
The blue indicator lamps in the switch 1
show which ventilation level you have
selected:
i
The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
is automatically set to the highest level
if activated via summer opening
feature (컄 page 252).
Level
3
Three indicator lamps on
2
Two indicator lamps on
Switching off seat ventilation
1
One indicator lamp on
왘
off
No indicator lamp on
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
1 Seat ventilation switch
Switching on seat ventilation
왘
Press seat ventilation switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps come on.
왘
Press seat ventilation switch 1
repeatedly until the desired seat ventilation level is reached.
Press seat ventilation switch 1
repeatedly until all blue indicator lamps
go out.
i
If one or more of the indicator lamps on
the seat ventilation switch 1 are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to
too many electrical consumers being
switched on. The seat ventilation
switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
again automatically as soon as
sufficient voltage is available.
123
Controls in detail
Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head
restraint should also be adjusted for
proper height. See also the section on
air bags (컄 page 63) for proper seat
positioning.
The following settings are stored when
using the buttons on the driver’s door:
앫
Driver’s seat, backrest and head
restraint position
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Exterior rear view mirror position
Warning!
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2.
124
The memory button and memory position
switch are located on the door.
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
1 Memory button
2 Memory position switch
왘
The following settings are stored when
using the buttons on the passenger door:
앫
Front passenger seat, backrest and
head restraint position
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
or
왘
Open the respective door and insert
the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory
왘
Recalling positions from memory
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors to the
desired position (컄 page 37).
왘
Turn memory position switch 2 to the
desired memory position.
왘
Press memory button 1.
왘
Release memory button 1 and press
memory position switch 2 within
three seconds.
All settings are stored to the selected
position.
!
Do not operate the seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is
in an excessively reclined position.
Doing so could cause damage to front
or rear seats.
i
Releasing the memory position switch
stops movement to the stored
positions immediately.
First move the seat backrest to an
upright position.
왘
Turn memory position switch 2 to the
desired memory position.
왘
Press and hold memory position
switch 2 until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior rear view mirrors have
completely moved to the stored
positions.
125
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position feature, see “Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror”
(컄 page 161) and “Activating exterior rear
view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 183).
Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror with button 2 so that you
see the rear wheel and the road curb.
왘
Press memory button 1.
왘
Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
1 Memory button
2 Adjustment button
3 Passenger side exterior rear view
mirror button
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
왘
Press button 3.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
126
왘
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 52)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 53).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* headlamps: The active Bi-Xenon
headlamps monitor your steering angle
and driving speed, then automatically
shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road
ahead, increasing usable illumination
over conventional headlamps.
U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 129)
C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
B Low beam headlamps (or high
beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward)
and parking lamps
Exterior lamp switch
i
M Off
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 129)
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
127
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
With the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the engine turned off
with KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s
door open, a warning sounds if the
parking lamps or low beam headlamps
are switched on.
The message Turn off lamps appears
in the multifunction display.
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and the parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
128
Warning!
G
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others,
activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button pressed once, only
the parking lamps will switch on and off
automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only
USA only
왘
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system,
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)” (컄 page 156).
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the exterior lamp switch
in position M, the high beam headlamps cannot be switched on.
When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a three-minute delay.
When the engine is running, and you
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps
switch on additionally.
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 127).
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 127).
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
The locator lighting and the night security
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Setting locator lighting” (컄 page 157) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 158).
The high beam flasher is available at all
times.
129
Controls in detail
Lighting
Fog lamps
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.
130
i
Front fog lamps
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with
the exterior lamp switch in
position U. For switching on the fog
lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B first.
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 52).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps switch on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 127).
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps switch off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘
Switch on the front fog lamps
(컄 page 130).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
second stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 127).
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The rear fog lamp switches off.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
High beam
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B or U (컄 page 127).
왘
Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 24).
왘
Combination switch
Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
131
Controls in detail
Lighting
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
(CLK with Bi-Xenon* headlamps)
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps improve illumination of the road into which
you are turning.
앫
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
will come on automatically depending
on the steering angle, even if you did
not switch on either turn signal.
If the corner-illuminating front fog
lamps came on automatically, they will
also go out automatically depending on
the steering angle.
the exterior lamp switch in
position B (컄 page 127)
Driving forward
or
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
the exterior lamp switch in
position U (컄 page 127)
or
앫
i
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only come on in low ambient lighting
conditions.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
function is not available at a vehicle
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
operate with the engine running and with
앫
i
the daytime running lamp mode
activated (컄 page 129)
132
왘
Depending on whether you are turning
left or right, switch on the left or right
turn signal (컄 page 53).
The respective front fog lamp comes on
and illuminates the road onto which
you are turning.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
where activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal.
If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be switched
off by returning the combination switch to
its original position.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving rearward
Hazard warning flasher
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KELESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position R.
The inverse front fog lamp comes on
automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘
Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.
Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘
All turn signals are flashing.
i
With the hazard warning flasher
activated and the combination switch
set for either left or right turn, only the
respective turn signals will operate
when the ignition is switched on.
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is
located on the upper part of the center
console.
Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘
The respective front fog lamp goes out.
Press hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
i
If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch 1 once to
switch it off.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
133
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
1 Left front reading lamp
2 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
3 Right front reading lamp
Activating automatic control
Deactivating automatic control
왘
왘
Press the rocker switch 2 to the center position.
Interior lamps are switched on in darkness when you:
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you:
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
The interior lamps are switched off after a
preset time, see “Setting interior lighting
delayed shut-off” (컄 page 159).
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after
approximately five minutes when the
SmartKey is removed or in starter
switch position 0.
An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
134
Press the = symbol on rocker
switch 2.
i
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk
is opened.
If you leave the trunk open for an extended period of time, the trunk lamp
will switch off automatically after approximately ten minutes.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Switching all front interior lights on and
off
왘
Press the W symbol on rocker
switch 2.
The front interior lights come on.
왘
Press rocker switch 2 to center
position to activate the automatic
control.
Switching right front reading lamp on
and off
왘
Press right button X.
The right reading lamp comes on.
왘
Switching left front reading lamp on and
off
왘
Press left button X.
The left reading lamp comes on.
왘
Press left button X again.
The left reading lamp goes out.
Door entry lamps
The appropriate door entry lamp switches
on if a door is opened in darkness and if
the interior lighting is switched to automatic function.
The entry lamp switches off automatically
when the door is closed.
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
exterior headlamps, the door entry
lamps will remain lit for approximately
five minutes.
Trunk lamp
Press right button X again.
The right reading lamp goes out.
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
opened.
If you leave the trunk open for an extended
period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
off automatically after approximately ten
minutes.
135
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(컄 page 24).
Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset button 1 to adjust the
illumination brightness for the instrument
cluster.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
1 Reset button
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition (컄 page 36)
앫
press reset button 1
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu
of the control system (컄 page 151).
136
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
To brighten illumination
왘
Turn reset button 1 clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
왘
Turn reset button 1 counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
i
Coolant temperature indicator
The coolant temperature indicator is on
the right side in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 24).
Warning!
앫
앫
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Excessive coolant temperature triggers
a warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 398) and the red coolant warning lamp in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 377).
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120°C.
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 120°C.
Doing so may cause serious engine
damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Trip odometer
왘
Make sure you are viewing the standard display in the multifunction display (컄 page 144).
왘
If it is not displayed, press button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears (컄 page 140).
왘
Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster (컄 page 136) until
the trip odometer is reset.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
137
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 24) denotes excessive engine
speed.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious
engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
138
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is indicated in the
multifunction display (컄 page 140).
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is in
position 1. The control system enables you
to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
i
The displays for the audio systems
(radio, CD player etc.) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected.
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction display
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 26).
1 Multifunction display
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting the
volume:
Press button
æ up / to increase
ç down / to decrease
3 Telephone*:
Press button
1 Outside temperature
2 Trip odometer
3 Current shift program mode
4 Main odometer
5 Current gear selector lever position/gear range
For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 142).
s to take a call
t to end a call
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
140
Controls in detail
Control system
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
앫
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus, see
“Submenus in the Settings menu”
(컄 page 149).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
142
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenus
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Standard display
AUDIO
NAV*
(컄 page 144)
(컄 page 145)
Run Flat Indicator*
Select radio
station
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Vehicle status
Settings
message memory1
Trip computer
Telephone*
(컄 page 146)
(컄 page 146)
(컄 page 161)
(컄 page 163)
Show route
guidance instructions, current direction
traveled
Calling up vehicle
Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone
malfunction, warning settings
statistics after
book
and system status
start
messages stored in
memory
(컄 page 148)
Digital speedometer Select satellite
radio station*
(USA only)
Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for
ter submenu
statistics since
name in
the last reset
phone book
Call up maintenance Operate CD
service display
player
Time/Date submenu
Check engine oil level (except CLK 350)
Lighting
submenu
Call up range
Vehicle submenu
Convenience
submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
143
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Display digital speedometer
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
왘
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Standard display menu
In the standard display, the outside temperature and the trip odometer are shown
in the multifunction display.
i
You can have the digital speedometer
displayed instead of the outside temperature in the standard display. You
can select the setting in the submenu
Instr. cluster via the function Basic
display (컄 page 152).
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display and the status line appears.
1 Outside temperature
2 Trip odometer
If you see another display, press
button è or ÿ repeatedly until the
standard display appears.
왘
Press button k or jto select
the functions in the standard display
menu.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Run Flat Indicator
342
Call up digital speedometer
144
Call up maintenance service 362
display
Check engine oil level
144
Press button j or k until the
digital speedometer appears in the
multifunction display.
323
1 Digital Speedometer
2 Status line with outside temperature
3 Trip odometer
i
You can have the digital speedometer
displayed instead of the outside temperature in the status line. You can select the setting in the submenu Instr.
cluster via the function Status line
display (컄 page 152).
Controls in detail
Control system
AUDIO menu
Select satellite radio station*
(USA only)
The functions in the Audio menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
application.
왘
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message Audio off is shown in the
multifunction display.
1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
The following functions are available:
왘
Function
Page
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
Select radio station
145
i
Select satellite radio station* 145
(USA only)
Operate CD player
146
Select radio station
왘
Turn on the radio (컄 page 212) and select radio. Vehicles with COMAND*:
Refer to separate operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the currently tuned station
appears in the multifunction display.
You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio
(컄 page 219).
Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to
separate operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
Select satellite radio with the
corresponding soft key (SAT) in the
radio menu.
1 SAT mode and preset number
2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Channel name or number
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
145
Controls in detail
Control system
i
왘
For more information on satellite radio
operation, see “Introduction to satellite
radio* (USA only)” (컄 page 222).
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the audio system or
the COMAND* system key pad located
in the center dashboard.
Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to
separate operating instructions.
Operate the CD player
왘
왘
Turn on the radio and select CD
(컄 page 227). Vehicles with
COMAND*: Refer to separate
operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the multifunction display.
NAV* menu
The Nav menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the message Nav appears in the
multifunction display.
앫
If COMAND* is switched off, the message Nav off appears in the multifunction display.
앫
1 Current CD (for CD changer*)
2 Current track
146
With COMAND* switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction of
travel and, if available, the name of the
street currently traveld on appear in
the multifunction display.
앫
With COMAND* switched on and route
guidance activated, the direction of
travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display.
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.
Vehicle status message memory menu
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the
system. Such messages appear in the
multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if there are any messages
stored.
Controls in detail
Control system
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 383).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message
memory appears in the multifunction
display.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, then there are
no messages stored.
Vehicle status messages have been
recorded
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display:
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch. With
KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine by
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the driver’s door.
i
1 Number of messages
왘
Press button k or j.
The vehicle status message memory
will be cleared when you switch on the
ignition(컄 page 34). You will then only
see high-priority messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 383).
The stored messages will now be
displayed in the order in which they
have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display” (컄 page 383).
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu
In the Settings menu there are two
functions:
앫
앫
왘
The function Reset to factory
settings?, with which you can reset all
the settings to the original factory
settings.
Resetting all settings
i
You can reset all the functions of all
submenus to the factory settings.
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. After approximately five seconds,
the Settings... menu reappears in
the multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 136) for
approximately three seconds.
The request to press the reset button
once more to confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
앫
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button once more.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
148
For safety reasons, the following
function is not reset while driving:
the Lamp circuit headlamp function in the Lighting submenu
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘
Press button j.
The collection of the submenus
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
with button æ.
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button j to access the
individual functions within that submenu.
Once within the submenu, you can use
button j to move to the next function
or button k to move to the previous
function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
Resetting the functions of a submenu
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘
Move to a function in the submenu.
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 136) in
the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
The request to press the reset button
once more to confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button once more.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. After approximately five seconds,
the Settings menu reappears in the
multifunction display.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE
LIGHTING
Selecting speedometer
display mode
Setting time (hours)
Setting daytime running Setting automatic lock- Activate easy-entry/exit
lamp mode (USA only) ing
feature
Selecting language
Setting time (minutes)
Setting locator lighting
Selecting display (speed Setting the date (month) Exterior lamps delayed
display or outside
shut-off
temperature) for the
status line
Selecting display (speed Setting the date (day)
display or outside temperature) for standard
display
Setting the date (year)
150
Interior lighting delayed
shut-off
VEHICLE
CONVENIENCE
Setting parking position for
exterior rear view mirror
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting speedometer display mode
Selecting language
Access the Instr. cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. cluster submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Display unit
Speed-/odometer appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Language appears in
the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting speedometer display
mode
151
Selecting language
151
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Selecting display (speed display 152
or outside temperature) for the
status line
Selecting display (speed display 152
or outside temperature) for
standard display
컄컄
왘
Press button æ or ç to set
speedometer unit to km or miles.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘
Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the
multifunction display messages.
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for the status line
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for standard display
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. cluster submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Status line display appears in the multifunction
display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Basic display
appears in the multifunction display.
Available languages:
앫
German (Deutsch)
앫
English (English)
앫
French (francais)
앫
Italian (italiano)
앫
Spanish (Español)
앫
Dutch (Nederlands)
앫
Danish (Dansk)
앫
Swedish (Svenska)
앫
Portuguese (Português)
앫
Turkish (Türkçe)
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
the desired setting.
i
You will see the status line when you
have called up a different display from
the standard display.
152
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button æ or ç to select
the display mode shown in the basic
display.
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu
Setting time (hours)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the instrument cluster
display settings.
This function can only be seen in vehicles
with audio system.
i
Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the time in
COMAND, refer to the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting the time (hours)
153
Setting the time (minutes)
154
Setting the date (month)
154
Setting the date (day)
155
Setting the date (year)
155
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 136) to confirm.
The hour is set and stored.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Clock, hours
Confirm by press. R appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the hour
setting.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting time (minutes)
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set date month
appears in the multifunction display.
This function can only be seen in vehicles
with audio system.
i
Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the time in
COMAND, refer to the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Clock, minutes
Confirm by press. R appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the minutes
setting.
154
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 136) to confirm.
The selection marker is on the month
setting.
The minutes are set and stored.
Setting the date (month)
This function can only be seen in vehicles
with audio system.
i
Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date in
COMAND, refer to the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
month.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (day)
The selection marker is on the day
setting.
This function can only be seen in vehicles
with audio system.
i
Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date in
COMAND, refer to the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set date day
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set date year
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the year
setting.
Press button æ or ç to set the
day.
Setting the date (year)
This function can only be seen in vehicles
with audio system.
i
Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date in
COMAND, refer to the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
year.
155
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle.
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
i
This function is not available in
countries where the daytime running
lamp mode is mandatory and therefore
in a constant mode.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
156
Setting locator lighting
157
Exterior lamps delayed
switch-off
158
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off
159
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Lamp circuit
headlamp appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
156
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (constant) activated.
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
Controls in detail
Control system
For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 127).
i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
Setting locator lighting
왘
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey:
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Function Surround
lighting appears in the multifunction
display.
앫
Parking lamps
For safety reasons, resetting the
Lighting submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 149) while driving will not
deactivate the daytime running lamp
mode.
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
Lighting – Cannot be completely
reset to factory settings while
driving.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.
To activate locator lighting:
왘
Make sure the function surround lighting is set to on, see (컄 page 157).
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function On.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle
(컄 page 127).
The locator lighting feature is
activated.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to illuminate during
darkness after exiting the vehicle and all
doors closed.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will switch on
for 15 seconds when the engine is turned
off:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
158
왘
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Headlamps delayed
shut-off appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine (컄 page 127).
The headlamps delayed shut-off
feature is activated.
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
왘
Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon
as you reinsert the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
on or off.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Vehicle submenu
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain lit during
darkness after you have removed the
SmartKey from the starter switch. If activated it remains lit for 10 seconds.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Interior lamp delayed shut-off appears in the
multifunction display.
Function
Page
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Setting automatic locking
159
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Automatic door
lock appears in the multifunction
display.
to make general vehicle settings.
The following function is available:
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the interior delayed shut-off feature on
or off.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the automatic central locking on or off.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature
160
Setting parking position for exte- 161
rior rear view mirror
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 42).
160
Warning!
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Convenience submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Function Easy-entry feature
appears in the multifunction display.
To cancel steering wheel movement, do one
of the following:
앫
Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 41).
앫
Press the memory position switch
(컄 page 124).
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the easy-entry/exit feature on or off.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid
function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers, when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 183).
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Convenience submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Mirror adjustment
parking aid appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle.
The following information is available:
Function
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
function on or off.
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 161
start
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
162
Call up range (distance to empty) 163
Fuel consumption statistics after start
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message After start appears
in the multifunction display.
컄컄
161
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
Fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message After reset appears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the reading that you want to reset
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 136) until
the value is reset to 0.
i
All statistics stored since the last
engine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2
within this time period.
162
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last reset
Controls in detail
Control system
Calling up range (distance to empty)
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Range appears in the
multifunction display.
The calculated range based on the
current fuel tank level appears in the
multifunction display.
TEL menu*
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic
conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and /or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the Tel menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and Audio or
COMAND*.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Which messages will appear in the
multifunction display depends on whether
your telephone is switched on or off:
Answering a call
Ending a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the multifunction display you will then see
the message:
왘
Press button t.
You have ended the call. The standby
message appears in the multifunction
display.
앫
If the telephone is off, the message
Tel off appears in the multifunction
display.
앫
If the telephone is on:
Dialing a number from the phone book
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the multifunction display is empty.
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, the message READY appears in
the multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
왘
You have answered the call. The
duration of the call appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k.
i
If you do not wish to accept a call,
press button t.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
164
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. The
message Please wait appears in the
multifunction display.
When the message Please wait
disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
왘
Press button s.
Redialing
The system dials the selected phone
number.
The control system stores the most
recently dialed phone numbers. This
eliminates the need to search through
your entire phone book.
앫
If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
The first number in the redial memory
appears in the multifunction display.
1 Name from the phone book
i
If you press and hold button j
or k for longer than one second,
the system scrolls rapidly through the
list of names until you release the
button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing t.
왘
앫
If no connection is made, the
control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
i
If you do not want to use the telephone,
press button t.
왘
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
165
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 48).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
i
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
앫
the gear selector lever
position D (컄 page 168) with
gear ranges (컄 page 171)
앫
the selected program mode:
(C/S) (컄 page 172)
or
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.
(M/C/S) (CLK 55 AMG only)
(컄 page 178)
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
166
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 170)
앫
the vehicle speed
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approximately 15 minutes.
Warning!
1 Current gear range/gear selector lever
position
2 Current program mode
The current gear range/gear selector lever
position and program mode (C/S) or
(M/C/S) appear in the multifunction
display.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
167
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
(컄 page 422).
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
168
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 57).
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from position P, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
169
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Driving tips
Stopping
Maneuvering
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
Accelerator position
왘
Leave the transmission in gear.
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
왘
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
When you stop longer with the engine
idling and/or on a hill:
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
170
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
왘
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘
Accelerate gently.
왘
Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
roll away.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D
and driving in the automatic shift
program C or S (컄 page 172), you can
select a gear range for the automatic
transmission to operate within:
Gear selector lever (컄 page 173):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+).
Steering wheel gearshift control
(CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG) (컄 page 174):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the respective downshift button on the
steering wheel gearshift control, and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the respective upshift button on the
steering wheel gearshift control.
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 167). If you
press on the accelerator when the engine
has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected.
Effect
ï The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
î The transmission shifts through
fifth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
Effect
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program
!
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Never change the program mode when
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
왘
Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
the desired program mode appears in
the multifunction display.
Select C for comfort driving:
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
i
The last selected program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.
1 Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (C/S) are
indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 167).
172
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission, you
can change the gears manually and limit or
extend the gear range for automatic
shifting with the gear selector lever in
position D and driving in the automatic
program mode C or S.
Downshifting
Warning!
Upshifting
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
!
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear as permitted by
the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 171).
i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to
the D- direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This may
involve shifting down one or more gears.
173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting
The steering wheel gearshift control provides an alternative method for changing
the gears manually and limiting or extending the gear range for automatic shifting
with the gear selector lever in position D
and driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
i
For information on using the steering
wheel gearshift control in manual program mode M (CLK 55 AMG only), see
“Manual shift program” (컄 page 178).
174
i
!
To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting with steering wheel
gearshift buttons, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
CLK 500
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located to the left and right of the steering
wheel.
Downshifting
Warning!
Upshifting
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press the outside 2 of one of
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program.This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
왘
1 Button, inside: downshift
2 Button, outside: upshift
i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
The last selected automatic program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.
Briefly press the inside 1 of one of the
buttons on the steering wheel.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously limits
the gear range of the transmission
(컄 page 171).
왘
Press and hold the outside 2 of one of
the buttons on the steering wheel
until D reappears in the multifunction
display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold the inside 1 of one of
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This may
involve shifting down one or more gears.
175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
CLK 55 AMG
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located to the left and right of the steering
wheel.
i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
Warning!
The last selected program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted in the automatic
program mode.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
The following instructions describe operation of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
1 Left button: downshift
2 Right button: upshift
176
Downshifting
For instructions on operating the steering
wheel gearshift control and gear selector
lever in the manual program mode M, see
“Manual shift program CLK 55 AMG”
(컄 page 178).
왘
G
Briefly press button 1 on the left side
of the steering wheel.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously limits
the gear range of the transmission
(컄 page 171) when you are driving in the
automatic program mode (C or S).
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Upshifting
Canceling gear range limit
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
왘
왘
Briefly press button 2 on the right
side of the steering wheel.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission
when you are driving in the automatic
program mode (C or S).
Press and hold button 2 on the right
side of the steering wheel until D
reappears in the multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Press and hold button 1 on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This may
involve shifting down one or more gears.
177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Manual shift program CLK 55 AMG
!
In addition to the automatic shift
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
with the manual shift program M.
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
In the manual program mode M,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshifting using the steering wheel gearshift buttons to the left and right of the steering
wheel (컄 page 176) or the gear selector
lever.
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
1 Program mode selector switch
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (M/C/S)
are indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 167).
178
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
i
i
For information on automatic program
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift
program” (컄 page 172), “Gear selector
lever one-touch gearshifting”
(컄 page 173), and “Steering wheel
gearshift control one-touch gearshifting” (컄 page 174).
The manual program mode M will not
be stored. When the engine is turned
off with the manual program mode M
selected, the transmission will go to
the automatic program mode (C or S)
when the engine is restarted.
Upshifting
Activating manual shift program
왘
Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
manual program mode M appears in
the multifunction display.
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
is not limited.
You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
can upshift or downshift through the gears
in succession.
!
In the manual program mode M, the
transmission will not upshift, even if
the engine has reached its overrevving
range. Shift up to the next gear before
the engine has reached its overrevving
range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red
marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 24). Otherwise the engine
could be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
or
왘
Briefly press button 2 on the right
side of the steering wheel
(컄 page 176).
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
If, instead of the manual program mode
symbol M, the p symbol appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 167), shift to
the next higher gear. The fuel supply will
otherwise be interrupted to prevent the
engine from overrevving.
179
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Kickdown
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
or
왘
Briefly press button 1 on the left side
of the steering wheel (컄 page 176).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
i
When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
180
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M is not possible.
Deactivating manual shift program
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch (컄 page 178) repeatedly
until C or S appears in the multifunction
display.
or
왘
Restart the engine.
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move gear selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
The transmission will go to the
automatic program mode (C or S).
왘
Wait at least ten seconds before
restarting.
The manual program mode M is not
stored.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers,
see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 53).
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
i
Rear view mirrors
The headlamps will automatically be
cleaned when you have
앫
switched on the headlamps
and
앫
For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 43).
operated the windshield wipers
with windshield washer fluid fifteen
times
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
position
When you switch off ignition, the
counter resets.
1 Headlamp washer button
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 486).
1 Lever
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
왘
Press button 1.
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night
position by moving lever 1 towards
the windshield.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
181
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
앫
the ignition is switched on,
and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror.
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the wind screen is
installed.
Glare can endanger you and others.
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear R is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
182
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
will be turned downward to the stored
position.
The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
왘
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 126).
왘
Make sure the Mirror adjustment
parking aid function in the
Convenience submenu of the control
system is switched to on (컄 page 161).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
왘
Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
앫
ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
앫
immediately once your vehicle exceeds
a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
앫
immediately when you press button 1
for the driver’s side mirror.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
183
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
왘
Swing sun visor 4 down when you
experience glare.
1 Mirror lamp
2 Mirror cover
3 Mounting
4 Sun visor
왘
To use the illuminated mirror, lift up
mirror cover 2.
i
If sun visor 4 is disengaged from
mounting 3 with mirror cover 2
open, mirror lamp 1 will switch off.
184
If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘
disengage sun visor from mounting 3.
왘
pivot sun visor to the side.
The sun visors are extendable.
왘
Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in the direction of the arrows.
!
Close mirror cover 2 (if open) before
you disengage the sun visor 4 from
mounting 3 and pivot it to the side.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the
defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The defroster is automatically
deactivated after approximately
6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on
the outside temperature.
Activating
왘
Press button F or 1 in the
climate control panel (컄 page 187) or
automatic climate control panel
(컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button F or 1 again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning!
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are
operating simultaneously and there is
insufficient voltage in the battery. The
system responds automatically by
deactivating the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically switches on again.
185
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
186
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Item
Item
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
1 Air volume control
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for center air vents
2 Left side temperature control
3 Right side air vent, adjustable
4 Air distribution control
4 Climate control panel
5 Rear window defroster
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
6 AC cooling on/off
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side center air vent
3 Right side temperature control
Canada only
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side center air vent
7 Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)
8 Air recirculation
9 Front defroster
8 Left center air vent, adjustable
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the
sliders for the side air vents 1 and 3
and center air vents 5 and 8 to the
middle position.
USA only
187
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate the climate control system in either the
automatic or manual mode. The system
cools or heats the interior depending on
the selected interior temperature and the
current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the
air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control (컄 page 187) to direct the air to
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
188
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 194).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air
pollution) may require replacement of
the filter before its scheduled interval.
A clogged filter will reduce the air
volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
“Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 252). The climate control will
then adjust the interior temperature to
the set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing
objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Deactivating the climate control
system
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
i
Deactivating
왘
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 187)
to position 0.
i
When the climate control system is deactivated, the outside air supply and
circulation are also deactivated. Only
choose this setting for a short time.
Otherwise the windows could fog up.
Reactivating
왘
Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 187)
to any speed.
왘
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can
be switched off if necessary.
Activating
왘
Use temperature controls 2 and 3
(컄 page 187) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the
passenger compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior
is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 187) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off.
Press button U (컄 page 187) while
the engine is running.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
189
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 2 and 3
(컄 page 187) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.
Decreasing
왘
왘
Turn temperature control 2
and/or 3 (컄 page 187) slightly counterclockwise.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
Press button U (컄 page 187).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic air distribution is
switched off. The air distribution is
controlled according to the selected
control setting
왘
Turn air distribution control 4
(컄 page 187) to the desired symbol.
Adjusting air distribution
Opening center and side air vents
Increasing
왘
Turn temperature control 2
and/or 3 (컄 page 187) slightly clockwise.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
190
Use air distribution control 4
(컄 page 187) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are located on the
controls:
Symbol
Function
a
Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger
compartment air vents
Z
Directs air to the windshield
and the side defroster vents
b
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Y
Directs air to the footwells
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 186) upward.
The side air vents 1 and 3 and center air vents 5 and 8 are open.
Closing center and side air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 186) downward.
The side air vents 1 and 3 and center air vents 5 and 8 are closed.
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Adjusting air volume
Front defroster
Six blower speeds are available.
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
왘
Press button U (컄 page 187).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic air volume control
is switched off. The air volume is controlled according to the currently selected control setting.
왘
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:
i
Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are
clear again.
Use the air volume control 1
(컄 page 187) to adjust the air volume.
Activating
왘
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 187).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
앫
cooling on to dehumidify
앫
maximum blowing and heating
power
앫
air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Deactivating
왘
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 187) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
i
The cooling remains switched on.
191
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Windshield fogged on the outside
i
Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 54).
왘
Press button U (컄 page 187).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Air distribution and air volume are adjusted automatically.
If the automatic mode of the climate control is switched off:
왘
Turn air distribution control 4 to
a or Y (컄 page 187).
192
Activating
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 194) is activated, or
press button P or 0.
왘
Press button , (컄 page 187).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures.
The indicator lamp on button , is
not lit when the air recirculation mode
is automatically switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows if there is
the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the , button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
Deactivating
i
왘
If you press and hold button ,, the
side windows will return to their previous position.
Press button , (컄 page 187).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside
temperature is below
approximately 41°F (5°C)
i
앫
If you press and hold button ,, the
side windows will close.
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above
approximately 41°F (5°C)
A side window will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved
to another position using the respective side window switch after it was
closed with button ,. A side window that was moved will remain in its
current position if button , is used
to re-open the remaining side windows.
193
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Air conditioning
The cooling function, is only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging
up.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
194
Deactivating
Activating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press button 2 (컄 page 187).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
왘
Press button 2 (컄 page 187) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the
refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free
of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone
layer.
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Controls in detail
Climate control (CLK 350)
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents
The air vents for the rear passenger
compartment are located in the rear
center console.
Adjusting air distribution
왘
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
compartment is controlled via the climate
control panel (컄 page 187).
Push the slide for the left center
vent 2 or right center vent 3 to the
left, right, up or down.
The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction.
i
i
The temperature at the center air vents
for the rear passenger
compartment 2 and 3 (컄 page 195)
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.
For draft-free ventilation, push
slides 2 and 3 upward.
Adjusting air volume
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
2 Left center air vent
3 Right center air vent
왘
Turn thumbwheel 1 to the left or right.
The air volume is increased or
decreased.
195
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
196
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Item
Item
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
3 Temperature control, left, raising
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for center air vents
4 Display
3 Right side air vent, adjustable
6 Temperature control, right, raising
4 Automatic climate control panel
7 Rear window defroster
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
8 Right side air distribution control
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side center air vent
5 Air volume control, raising
Canada only
9 Charcoal filter
a AC cooling on/off
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side center air vent
Residual heat/ventilation
(Canada only)
8 Left center air vent, adjustable
b Temperature control, right, lowering
i
c Air volume control, lowering
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 1, 3, 5,
8 to the middle position.
d Temperature control, left, lowering
e Air recirculation
USA only
Item
1 Left side air distribution control
f Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
g Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)
2 Front defroster
197
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
air distribution controls (컄 page 197) to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
198
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air
enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 206).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for
heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air
pollution) may require replacement of
the filter before its scheduled interval.
A clogged filter will reduce the air
volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
“Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 252). The automatic climate
control will then adjust the interior
temperature to the set value much
faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing
objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Deactivating the automatic climate
control system
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
i
Deactivating
왘
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Press button ´ (컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button ´
comes on.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can
be switched off if necessary.
i
When the air conditioning is switched
off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise
the windows could fog up.
You can switch the automatic climate
control system on and off for each side
of the passenger compartment as desired.
Press button ´ (컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button ´
goes out.
왘
i
Reactivating
왘
1 Temperature, left
2 Blower speed
3 Temperature, right
Use temperature controls 3 and
d or 6 and b (컄 page 197) to separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior
is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
Activating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 197) while
the engine is running.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
왘
Press button U (컄 page 197) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off.
199
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 3 and d for
the left side or 6 and b for the right side
(컄 page 197) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The automatic climate control will adjust
to the set temperature as fast as possible.
Increasing
왘
Press and hold temperature button 3
and/or 6 (컄 page 197) until the desired temperature appears in the display of the control panel 4
(컄 page 197).
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
200
Decreasing
왘
Press and hold temperature button b
and/or d (컄 page 197) until the desired temperature appears in the display of the control panel 4
(컄 page 197).
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 1 and 8
(컄 page 197) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
located on the controls:
Symbol
Function
Z
Directs air to the windshield
and the side defroster vents
b
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Y
a
Directs air to the footwells
Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger
compartment air vents
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
왘
Turn air distribution control 1 or 8
(컄 page 197) to the desired symbol.
Closing center and side air vents
왘
The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out.
The automatic air distribution is
switched off. The air distribution is
controlled according to the selected
control setting.
i
You can also turn the air distribution
control to a position between two
symbols
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 196) downward.
The center air vents 5 and 8 and side
air vents 1 and 3 (컄 page 196) are
closed.
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 196) upward.
The center air vents 5 and 8 and side
air vents 1 and 3 (컄 page 196) are
open.
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
i
Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are
clear again.
Adjusting air volume
Use button U (컄 page 197) for automatic mode or air volume controls or Q (컄 page 197) to adjust air volume
manually.
Seven blower speeds are available.
Opening center and side air vents
Front defroster
왘
Press button to decrease
or Q (컄 page 197) to increase air
volume to the desired level.
Activating
왘
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out.
The automatic air distribution remains
switched on.
201
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:
i
앫
cooling on the dehumidify
앫
maximum blowing and heating
power
앫
air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
왘
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
If the automatic mode of the automatic climate control is switched off:
앫
Deactivating
왘
Windshield fogged on the outside
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 197) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
i
The cooling remains switched on.
202
Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 54).
Turn air distribution control 1 or 8
to a or Y (컄 page 197).
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U (컄 page 197) and there is a
high need for cooling, the display
“MAXCOOL” appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when side windows
and soft top are closed).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Activating
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 206) is activated, or
press button P or 0.
왘
Press button , (컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures.
The indicator lamp on the button ,
is not lit when the air recirculation
mode is automatically switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows if there is
the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the , button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
i
If you press and hold button ,, the
side windows will close.
203
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Deactivating
i
왘
If you press and hold button ,, the
side windows will return to their previous position.
Press button , (컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside
temperature is below
approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside
temperature is above
approximately 41°F (5°C)
204
A side window will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved
to another position using the respective side window switch after it was
closed with button ,. A side window that was moved will remain in its
current position if button , is used
to re-open the remaining side windows.
Charcoal filter
An activated charcoal filter markedly
reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment. The charcoal filter can be activated
or deactivated.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode, if the
앫
charcoal filter is switched on.
앫
carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen
oxide (NOX) concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level.
i
The automatic air recirculation mode
does not function if the A/C (indicator
lamp on button 2 or 9 not lit)
mode is deactivated, or if the outside
temperature has fallen below 41°F
(5°C).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Activating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
If you press and hold button e, the
side windows will close.
i
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on
the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or
cooled down.
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows if there is
the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the e button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
Deactivating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
If you press and hold button e, the
side windows will return to their previous position.
A side window will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved
to another position using the respective side window switch after it was
closed with button e. A side window that was moved will remain in its
current position if button e is used
to re-open the remaining side windows.
205
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging
up.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
206
Deactivating
Activating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the
vehicle will then no longer be cooled or
dehumidified.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press button 2 or 9
(컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
왘
Press button 2 or 9
(컄 page 197) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Residual heat and ventilation*
(Canada only)
Activating
Deactivating
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
왘
Press button 9 (컄 page 197).
i
How long the system will provide
heating depends on
앫
the coolant temperature
앫
the temperature set by the operator
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Press button 9 (컄 page 197).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
The blower will run at speed setting 1
regardless of the air distribution
control setting.
207
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control (CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG)
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents
The air vents for the rear passenger
compartment are located in the rear
center console.
Adjusting air distribution
왘
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
compartment is controlled via the automatic climate control panel (컄 page 197).
The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction.
i
i
The temperature at the center air vents
for the rear passenger
compartment 2 and 3 (컄 page 208)
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.
For draft-free ventilation, push
slides 2 and 3 upward.
Adjusting air volume
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
2 Left center air vent
3 Right center air vent
208
Push the slide for the left center
vent 2 or right center vent 3 to the
left, right, up or down.
왘
Turn thumbwheel 1 to the left or right.
The air volume is increased or decreased.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone*, operation
Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help
you become familiar with your
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description
of the user functions.
Warning!
G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a
standstill and operate the system only when
road and traffic conditions permit. Always
pay full attention to traffic conditions first
before operating system controls while
driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Warning!
Sound system*
G
Your vehicle is equipped with a sound system. The subwoofer is located between the
rear seats.
Any alterations made to electronic
components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
radio*, and telephone* are interconnected.
When one of the components is not operational or has not been removed/replaced
properly, the function of other components
may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Make sure no objects fall into the openings of the subwoofer between the rear
seats.
If necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to remove any
objects which may have fallen into the
openings.
209
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
210
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item
1 CD changer mode selector
AUX mode selector
2 Single CD mode selector
Page
227
216
228
3 Radio mode selector
4 Mute function (radio)
Pause (CD)
220
233
5 Volume distribution
215
6 Sound settings
213
Item
Page
9 Speed dialing memory (telephone) in descending order
Item
Page
g Soft keys
212
h Volume
213
a Accepting a call
(telephone)
238
j Switching on/off
212
b Telephone mode selector
233
k Manual tuning / seek
tuning (radio)
218
c Speed dialing memory (telephone) in ascending order
235
d Terminating a call
(telephone)
239
7 Display
e CD slot
8 Alphanumeric keypad
f CD ejection
Track search, reverse (CD)
232
l Manual tuning / seek
tuning (radio)
218
Track search,
fast forward (CD)
232
229
211
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alphanumeric
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as
“soft keys”.
!
Operation
i
Switching the unit on/off
If the radio is switched on without the
key in the starter switch, it will
automatically switch off again after
approx. 30 minutes.
Switching on
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
왘
If the audio system was on as you
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch, the audio system will
automatically come back on as you
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2.
Do not press directly in the display
face. Otherwise, the display will be
damaged.
or
왘
If your vehicle is equipped with a
telephone, the display may prompt you
to enter your PIN (GSM network) or
code (TDMA or CDMA network).
Switching off
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
or
Press M button.
왘
Press M button.
i
Should excessively high temperatures
occur while the audio system is being
operated, the display will dim. If temperatures continue to rise, HIGH TEMP
will appear in the display, after which
the audio system will be switched off
for a cooling-down period.
212
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting the volume
왘
Turn rotary control of N button.
Bass
Adjusting treble
왘
Press O button repeatedly until
BASS appears in the display.
왘
Press O button repeatedly until
TREBLE appears in the display.
왘
Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly.
왘
Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i
If your vehicle equipment includes a
Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
telephone*, you can adjust its volume
separately from the volume of the
audio system while the telephone is
being used.
Adjusting sound functions
The bass and treble functions are called up
by pressing the O button.
Settings for bass and treble are stored
separately for the AM and FM wavebands,
weather band, CD mode and telephone
mode.
or
왘
or
Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass
tones to their center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
왘
Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble
tones to their center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
213
Controls in detail
Audio system
Sound system*
The sound setting is reset depending
on the sound source activated.
You can either program the sound settings
manually (컄 page 213) or choose settings
via preset sound characteristics.
앫
Radio mode: STANDARD
앫
CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
You can select from among the following
settings:
앫
Telephone: SPEECH
앫
STANDARD: conventional stereo sound.
앫
SURROUND: the sound is set for better
three-dimensional acoustic characteristics.
앫
왘
왘
SPEECH: the sound is optimized for the
spoken word.
Press O button repeatedly until
STANDARD, SURROUND or SPEECH appears
in the display.
Press X or Y soft key repeatedly
until the desired sound setting has
been reached.
The sound is set accordingly.
or
왘
Press RES soft key briefly.
214
왘
or
왘
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
appears in the display.
The sound settings for bass and treble
are returned to their center level and
the volume is set to a predefined level.
Returning sound functions to factory
settings
왘
Press RES soft key briefly; the respective sound function is reset to its center
level.
Vehicles with sound system*:
The sound setting is reset depending
on the sound source activated.
Press O button to call up settings
menu in the display.
앫
앫
Radio mode: STANDARD
앫
CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
Telephone: SPEECH
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the
last soft key is pressed.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting volume distribution
왘
Call up fader and balance functions by
pressing the P button.
Fader
왘
Press P button repeatedly until
FADER appears in the display.
Press V or W soft key.
Adjusting balance
The volume is distributed accordingly
between the front and rear of the vehicle.
왘
Press P button repeatedly until
BALANCE appears in the display.
왘
Press X or Y soft key.
or
왘
Press RES soft key briefly.
The fader is reset to its center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
The volume is distributed between the
left and right sides of the vehicle.
or
왘
Press RES soft key briefly.
The balance is reset to its center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last button is pressed.
215
Controls in detail
Audio system
Returning volume distribution to factory settings
왘
Press P button to call up settings
menu in the display.
Telephone* muting
Calling up AUX mode
If your vehicle equipment includes a
Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system
while the telephone is being used.
왘
Connecting an external audio source
(AUX) to the radio*
왘
Press RES soft key briefly; the respective volume distribution is reset to its
center (flat) level.
or
왘
Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
appears in the display.
The volume distribution settings for
fader and balance are set to their center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the
last soft key is pressed.
216
An optional dealer-installed cinch-connector* for connecting an external audio
source may become available for your vehicle model. Feature description is based
on preliminary information at time of printing. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
You can adjust the volume (컄 page 213),
the sound settings (컄 page 213) and the
volume distribution (컄 page 215) for the
AUX input.
Press and hold Q button until AUX
appears in the display.
Canceling AUX mode
왘
Press any audio source button.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Radio operation
Calling up wavebands for radios without
SAT*
Calling up wavebands for radios with
SAT*
Selecting radio mode
왘
왘
왘
Press b button.
The FM and AM wavebands are called
up one after another.
Calling up wavebands
You can choose from among the FM, AM
and WB wavebands.
Weather band (컄 page 221).
i
FM waveband:
87.7......107.9 mHz
AM waveband:
530......1710 kHz
Press FM or AM soft key to switch between FM and AM.
or
왘
Press WB soft key.
The weather band menu is called up.
Press FM, AM or WB soft key repeatedly
until desired waveband has been selected.
The FM, AM and WB wavebands are
called up one after another.
The waveband currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
The waveband currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
217
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting a station
Direct frequency input
Manual tuning
The following options are available for selecting a station:
왘
왘
Select desired waveband.
왘
Press S or T button for approx.
three seconds.
왘
Press button repeatedly until desired
frequency has been reached.
앫
Direct frequency input (컄 page 218)
앫
Manual tuning (컄 page 218)
앫
Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 219)
앫
Scan search (컄 page 219)
앫
Station memory (컄 page 219)
앫
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
(컄 page 220)
The station search proceeds in the following frequency increments:
앫
200 kHz in FM range
앫
10 kHz in AM range
218
Select desired waveband.
왘
Press * button.
왘
Enter desired frequency with buttons
1 to R.
i
You can only enter frequencies within
the respective waveband.
If a button is not pressed within
four seconds, the radio will return to
the last station tuned.
Step-by-step station tuning takes place
in ascending or descending order. Each
time the button is pressed, the radio
tunes further by 0.2 mHz. During manual tuning, the radio is muted.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Automatic seek tuning
Scan search
Station memory
왘
Select desired waveband.
앫
왘
Press S or T button briefly.
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations
in the memory.
Starting scan search
왘
Select desired waveband.
앫
The radio will tune to the next highest
or next lowest receivable frequency.
i
If no station is received after two
consecutive scans of the complete
frequency range, then the scan stops
at the frequency from which it began.
왘
왘
Tune in desired station.
왘
Press and hold desired station
button 1 to R until a brief
signal tone is heard.
The frequency is stored on the selected station button.
Press SC soft key.
SC will appear in the display. The ra-
dio briefly tunes in all receivable
stations on the waveband selected.
앫
Storing stations
앫
Calling up stations
왘
Press desired station button 1
to R briefly.
Ending scan search
왘
Press SC soft key or S or T.
The station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the
display.
219
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
Autostore – automatic station memory
The Autostore memory function provides
an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
overwritten.
앫
Calling up Autostore memory level and
storing stations
앫
The radio switches to the Autostore
memory level. AS and SEARCH appear in the display and the radio
finds the ten stations with the
strongest signals. These stations
are stored on the station buttons
1 to R in order of signal
strength.
The radio mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone* (컄 page 238).
Press desired station button 1
to R.
Leaving the Autostore memory level
왘
220
Interrupting radio mode
Calling up stations
왘
앫
Press AS soft key briefly.
Press FM or AM soft key briefly.
앫
Mute on
왘
Press U button.
The radio mode is interrupted and
MUTED appears in the display.
앫
Mute off
왘
Press U button.
The radio mode is again active.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Weather band
Selecting a weather band station
directly
왘
Scan search
앫
Select desired weather band station
with buttons 1 to 7.
Starting scan search
왘
SC will appear in the display. The ra-
If a station cannot be tuned in, a search
is automatically started.
Search
왘
Press WB soft key.
The weather band station last received
is tuned in.
왘
Press S or T button to tune in
the next receivable weather band station.
i
Press SC soft key.
dio briefly tunes in all receivable
weather band stations.
앫
Ending scan search
왘
Press SC soft key or S or T.
The weather band station last
played will be selected and SC disappears from the display.
If no weather band station is received
after three consecutive scans of the
complete frequency range, then the
scan stops at the channel with which it
began and NO WB FOUND appears in the
display.
If this happens, switch back to standard radio mode.
221
Controls in detail
Audio system
Introduction to satellite radio*
(USA only)
SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 channels of digital-quality radio, among others
music, sports, news, and entertainment,
free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio
uses a fleet of high-power satellites to
broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to
coast, in the contiguous U.S.
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is available for a monthly subscription fee.
For more information and service
availability call the SIRIUS Service Center
(컄 page 226), or contact
www.siriusradio.com
222
i
i
Additional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to a satellite radio
service provider are required for the
satellite radio operation described
here.
Satellite radio service may be unavailable or interrupted from time to time
for a variety of reasons, such as environmental or topographic conditions
and other things beyond the service
provider’s or our control. Service might
also not be available in certain places
(e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or
within or next to buildings) or near other technologies.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for details and availability for
your vehicle.
Note that categories and channels
shown in illustrations are dependent on
programming content delivered by the
service provider. Programming content
is subject to change. Therefore, channels and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this
manual may differ from the channels
and categories delivered by the service
provider.
Program categories
The channels are categorized. Categories
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
a certain type of program (category mode)
(컄 page 225).
Controls in detail
Audio system
Calling up the SAT main menu
왘
Press SAT soft key.
SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand
corner of the display.
Prior to activation of the satellite radio
service (컄 page 223).
After activation of satellite radio service (컄 page 223).
Prior to activation of the satellite radio
service
왘
Press ESN soft key.
i
The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in
your vehicle is displayed.
The system will tune to a default station if no station had been selected previously.
This information is required to call the
SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request.
i
Credit card information may also be required for your application.
The activation process takes approximately five to ten minutes after calling
the SIRIUS Service Center.
After activation of the satellite radio service
The telephone number of the SIRIUS
Service Center (888-539-7474) is displayed.
The satellite radio main menu appears.
The radio station selected last is audible,
provided it can be received.
The first channel 001 is called up and the
PTY system changes to All categories.
If no station can be received, ACQUIRING
appears in the display.
If the Satellite radio service is not
activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the
radio display and NO SAT will appear in the
multifunction display.
223
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting a station
Accessing via number keys
The following options are available:
왘
앫
Selecting a station using the selected
category (컄 page 225).
앫
Tuning via station presets
(컄 page 224).
앫
Tuning via scan search (컄 page 225).
앫
Tuning via manual channel input
(컄 page 224).
앫
Tuning via the program category list
(컄 page 225).
The radio plays the station stored under this number and the PTY function
changes to the category corresponding
to the station.
Tuning via manual channel input
224
Press *.
Input line appears in the main radio
menu.
Enter number of preset you wish to select, e.g. 1.
왘
Use number keys to enter desired
channel within eight seconds,
e.g. 1 6.
The system tunes to channel 16.
The station you have selected begins to
play.
i
You can only enter available channel
numbers.
Tuning via station presets
Ten satellite radio station presets are available.
You can access the presets via number
keys.
왘
Example: tuning in channel 16
Controls in detail
Audio system
Tuning via the program category list
The system will automatically switch to
a station of the selected category if the
currently selected station is not of the
selected category. Otherwise, the currently selected station remains tuned.
The category list contains all currently receivable categories of programs. It is
arranged alphabetically.
앫
Selecting a category
왘
앫
Press PTY soft key.
왘
왘
Press <<< or >>> soft key.
This switches between the individual categories.
Scan search is characterized as follows:
앫
Scan search plays a channel for approx. eight seconds and then skips to
the next channel within the current category.
앫
Scan search can be terminated manually.
왘
Press SC soft key.
Tuning a station within the selected
category
The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged
numerically. Only one entry is visible at
a time.
The current PTY category of the station is displayed.
Tuning via scan search
The search starts. SC appears in the
display.
Press S or T button briefly.
The next station within the category
is started.
왘
Press SC soft key again.
The search stops.
or
왘
Press and hold S or T button for approx. three seconds until
desired station has been reached.
When changing the category, the channel selected last in the new category
becomes audible.
225
Controls in detail
Audio system
Obtaining additional text information
Storing stations
Calling up the ESN information menu
Additional text information (artist, title) related to the current channel can be displayed.
왘
Tune in desired station.
왘
Press INF soft key.
왘
Press and hold desired station button
1 to R until a brief signal tone is
heard.
왘
Press ESN soft key.
왘
Press INF soft key.
The title being played is displayed.
왘
Press INF soft key again.
The name of the artist performing the
title being played is displayed.
i
If a button is not pressed within
four seconds, the radio will return to
the standard display.
The frequency is stored on the selected
station button.
The radio saves the current station at
the memory preset selected. The memory preset selected appears in the status line, e.g. S3.
i
There are ten presets available.
An existing entry is overwritten in the
memory list when a new entry is given.
226
The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in
your vehicle is displayed.
왘
Press RET soft key to exit the menu.
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD mode
Warning!
Safety precautions
Warning!
G
The single CD player and the CD changer*
are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger
of invisible laser radiation if the housing is
opened or damaged.
Do not open the housing. The single CD
player and the CD changer* do not contain
any parts that can be serviced by the user.
For safety reasons, have any service work
which may be necessary performed only by
qualified personnel.
G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should insert
CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio system only if permitted by
road, weather and traffic conditions.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
General notes
The system may not be able to play audio
CDs with copy protection.
Playing copied CDs may cause
malfunctions during playback.
!
If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can
become warped due to the heat that
develops in the CD drive or CD changer*.
In certain situations, the CDs can then
no longer be ejected and cause damage to the drive. Such damage is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
!
Your CD drive or CD changer* has been
designed to play CDs which correspond to the EN 60908 standard. You
can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g.
ones that have data on both sides (one
side with DVD data, the other side with
audio data), they cannot be ejected and
will damage the drive.
227
Controls in detail
Audio system
Do not use CDs with an eight cm diameter,
not even with a CD adapter. Attempting to
play CDs with an eight cm diameter or
playing such CDs with an adapter may
cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
앫
Should excessively high or low temperatures occur while in CD changer mode*,
CD TEMP will appear in the display, and the
CD will be muted until the temperature has
reached an acceptable level for the system
to continue operation.
앫
Replace the CD in its case after use.
앫
Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
The single CD player and the CD changer*
play audio CDs.
Tips on handling CDs
앫
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback.
앫
Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust
on the CDs.
앫
Do not write on CDs or apply any labels
or other material to them.
228
Clean CDs from time to time with a
commercially available cleaning cloth.
Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;
instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in the center and moving outward.
Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays,
etc. for cleaning.
Operating the single CD player in the
audio system unit
Loading a CD
The single CD player in the audio system
unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot
for loading the drive is located underneath
the soft keys.
왘
Make sure the system is switched on.
왘
Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of
the CD must face upwards.
The system automatically pulls the CD
into the CD slot. The audio CD begins
to play.
!
If a CD is already loaded, it must be
ejected before inserting a new CD. Inserting a second CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will cause damage
to the CD drive not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or
cannot be read, WRONG CD0 will appear
in the display.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Ejecting a CD
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
왘
Make sure the system is switched on.
i
왘
Press EJECT button.
The CD changer* may not be able to
play audio CDs with copy protection.
The system ejects the CD. NO CD will
appear in the display.
왘
Remove CD from slot.
i
왘
Place CD 1 in recess of tray, label side
up.
왘
Push tray into magazine in direction of
arrow.
i
왘
Slide changer door to the right and
press g button.
왘
Magazine will be ejected.
If you do not take the CD out of the CD
slot within approx. 15 seconds, the system automatically pulls the CD back in
and plays it.
CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be
played.
왘
Push magazine into CD changer 2 in
direction of arrow and close sliding
door.
If a CD is pulled back in, press
EJECT button for five seconds; the CD
will then be ejected.
Operational readiness of CD changer*
If a CD changer has been installed in the
vehicle, it can be operated from the front
control panel of the audio system. A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs.
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
The CD changer is located in the glove box.
왘
Remove magazine 4 and pull
CD tray 3 fully out.
229
Controls in detail
Audio system
Playing CDs
Single CD player in the audio unit
왘
Press i button.
CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand
corner of the display.
The CD will resume playback at the point
where it was switched off.
CD changer*
왘
Press Q button.
You have the following options:
CD and the selected magazine slot num-
앫
Audio system with CD changer*: selecting CDs
앫
Direct track entry
앫
Track skip forward/reverse
앫
Fast forward/reverse
앫
Scan
앫
Random tracks
앫
Repeat track
ber appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
If you have not removed a CD since the last
time the CD audio source was activated,
the last CD listened to will begin to play at
the point where it was switched off.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.
230
Playing tracks
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD
changer*
Direct track entry
Skipping tracks forward/backward
앫
Skipping tracks forward
왘
Press S button briefly.
The next track will be played.
앫
Skipping tracks backward
왘
왘
You can select from among the
inserted CDs with buttons
R to 6.
R = CD player in the audio unit
1 to 6 = CDs in the
CD changer*
The magazine slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD in the display, and the number of the currently
played track appears next to TRACK.
You can make a direct selection from
among the tracks on a CD.
왘
Press * button.
왘
Enter track number using buttons 1
to R.
The number of the track being played
appears next to TRACK in the display.
You can only enter available track numbers.
Press T button briefly.
If the track has been playing for
more than ten seconds, the unit
skips back to the beginning of the
track currently playing. If less than
ten seconds have been played, the
unit skips back to the beginning of
the previous track.
Pressing the T or S button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being
skipped.
i
If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears in the display
with the corresponding slot number.
231
Controls in detail
Audio system
Fast forward/reverse
Random play
Repeat
앫
The random function (RDM) plays the
tracks of the current CD in random order.
The track being played is repeated until the
repeat function is switched off.
Fast forward
왘
앫
Press and hold S button until
desired point has been reached.
Reverse
왘
Press and hold T button until
desired point has been reached.
i
앫
The track number and the relative time
of the track is shown in the display during the search.
앫
Starting scan
왘
Press SC soft key.
SC will appear in the display.
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approx. eight seconds in
ascending order.
앫
Ending scan
왘
232
Press SC soft key or T or S.
i
When you start the RDM function, the
RPT function is automatically switched
off.
When you start the RPT function, the
RDM function is automatically
switched off.
Switching on random
왘
Switching off random
왘
앫
Press RDM soft key again.
Switching on repeat
왘
Press RDM soft key.
RDM appears in the display. A randomly selected track is played.
앫
Scan
i
Press RPT soft key.
RPT appears in the display.
앫
Switching off repeat
왘
Press RPT soft key again.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Pause function
Track and time display
GSM network phones
The CD changer* mode is interrupted by
an incoming call on the telephone*
(컄 page 238).
앫
Warning!
Switching on pause function
왘
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Press T soft key.
The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
왘
Press U button.
왘
The CD changer* mode is interrupted and PAUSE appears in the display.
앫
Switching off pause function
왘
Press U button.
The CD changer* mode is active
again.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Press T soft key again.
The total number of tracks and the total
playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
왘
G
Press T soft key.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
The standard CD playback menu appears in the display.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
233
Controls in detail
Audio system
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, a number of functions and
operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display.
Switching on the telephone
Switching on the telephone
왘
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel
and the cellular telephone*.
If your audio system is set up for telephone
operation, the t symbol will appear in
the display.
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
specified mobile telephone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds (컄 page 234).
This display disappears when you press
any button.
When your mobile telephone is inserted
into the telephone cradle, you will see the
reception strength in the upper right-hand
corner of the display.
234
PIN entry
Press h button.
If the telephone was previously
switched off, PROCESSING appears in
the display and you will then be
prompted to enter your PIN.
왘
Enter PIN number using buttons 1
to R.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘
Press OK soft key after entering correct
PIN.
Switching off the telephone
왘
Press h button for approx. three
seconds.
PROCESSING appears in the display until
the telephone is off. Afterward,
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
왘 READY or ROAMING will appear in the dis-
play.
Controls in detail
Audio system
i
If the PIN is entered incorrectly three
times, NEED PUK will appear in the display. Enter PUK via your telephone.
Please refer to the separate telephone
operating instructions for more information.
Placing a call
Turn rotary control of N button during a telephone call.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i
The volume can be adjusted separately
for telephone mode and audio mode.
Adjusting sound
왘
Adjust sound during a telephone call.
Sound adjustment (컄 page 213).
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘
After correct telephone number has
been entered, press s button.
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
i
Adjusting the volume
왘
왘
왘
Enter desired telephone number using
buttons 1 to R.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only twelve of these are visible in
the display.
If the telephone number has been
saved together with a name in the telephone book, the name will appear in
the display.
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book of
the telephone can be called up either by
name or number.
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
phone book.
235
Controls in detail
Audio system
i
This is only possible, however, when
the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not
transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored
in the phone book.
앫
Searching and calling up telephone
book entries by name
왘
Press MEM soft key or press ‚ or
ƒ.
왘
Press desired numerical key 2
to 9.
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of
the initial letters (e.g. for S -Smith,
press button 7 four times).
or
왘
You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book using the audio
system. You can access both the main
entries and the sub-entries of your
phone book.
The system jumps from one initial
letter to the next in ascending or
descending order.
왘
or
236
Press and hold button ‚ or
ƒ.
Press and hold button ‚ or
ƒ until desired initial letter has
been reached.
왘
Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been
reached.
The stored entries are selected in
alphabetical order with the sub-entries.
i
Several sub-entries can be stored for
each main entry (name). These entries
are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper
left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries
are possible:
CEL = Mobile phone
HOM = Home
WOR = Work
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
앫
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
왘
Press MEM soft key or press ‚ or
ƒ.
The call will be made.
왘
Press RCV soft key (received calls).
Search for desired entry.
왘
Press NUM soft key.
왘
The telephone number of the phone
book entry appears in the display.
앫
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
The letter R and the number of the
memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
The numbers are stored in the order
of the calls received.
Returning calls received
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
The call will be made.
Speed dial
If you have stored telephone numbers
as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio
head unit.
The number of received calls and
then the call last received appear
briefly in the display.
Viewing the telephone number of a
telephone book entry
왘
앫
왘
Press desired button 1 to R
briefly.
왘
Press s button.
The call will be made.
앫
Turbo dial
If you have stored telephone numbers
as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio
head unit.
왘
Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
237
Controls in detail
Audio system
Redial
If the number you have dialed is busy, you
can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial
function.
왘
왘
i
If you have activated the automatic redial function on your telephone, the
number of the person being called is
automatically redialed after a short
waiting period if there is a busy signal.
Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone.
Press s button.
Accepting an incoming call
The telephone number last dialed
will appear in the display.
If the telephone is active in the background
(reception symbol is visible in the display),
the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be
heard and the caller’s telephone number,
or the name under which the telephone
number has been saved in the phone book,
appears in the display. If the caller’s number is not transmitted with the call, CALL
will appear in the display.
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
The letter L and the number of the
memory position appears in the
left-hand corner of the display. The
numbers are stored in the order of
the calls made.
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
The call will be made.
앫
Manual redial
238
왘
Press s button.
The call is accepted.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Muting a call
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
앫
Mute on
왘
Press MUT soft key.
왘 MIC MUTE will
앫
appear in the display.
Mute off
왘
Press MUT soft key again.
If you wish to receive or place another call
during an already active call, you can accept or place the second call and switch
between the callers or combine them into
one call. Note that the features described
here are depending on availability from
your mobile phone service provider.
앫
Terminating a call
왘
i
Talking with two callers at the same
time
Press t button.
The current call is terminated and the
muted audio source becomes active
again.
Placing/accepting a second call
왘
Place new call by entering telephone number manually.
왘
Press s button.
You will be notified of the second call
acoustically, but you will not see this in
the display.
You are connected with the second
caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
앫
Switching between calls
왘
Press 2 and s buttons.
This switches between the calls.
The non-active call is kept on hold.
You are connected to the second
caller; the first caller is kept on
hold.
or
왘
Press s button to accept a second call.
239
Controls in detail
Audio system
앫
Terminating a call
왘
TDMA or CDMA network phones
Press t button.
The current call is terminated. You
are again connected with the caller
previously placed on hold.
앫
Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Combining two calls
왘
Press 3 and s buttons.
The calls are combined into one
call.
앫
Terminating a combined call
왘
G
Press t button.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
The connection to both callers is
terminated.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
240
Observe all legal requirements.
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, a number of functions and
operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display.
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel
and the mobile telephone*.
If your audio system is set up for telephone
operation, the t symbol will appear in
the display.
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
specified mobile telephone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds (컄 page 241).
This display disappears when you press
any button.
When your mobile telephone is inserted
into the telephone cradle, you will see the
reception strength in the upper right-hand
corner of the display.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Switching on the telephone
왘
Switching on the telephone
왘
The telephone is unlocked. If you have
entered an incorrect code, you must
enter the correct code.
Press h button.
If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must now
enter the code.
Press OK soft key after entering correct
code.
Switching off the telephone
왘
Press h button for approx. three
seconds.
Adjusting sound
왘
Adjust sound during a telephone call.
Sound adjustment (컄 page 213).
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
PROCESSING appears in the display until
the telephone is off. Afterward, PHONE
OFF appears in the display.
Adjusting the volume
왘
Enter code using buttons 1 to
R.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘
Turn rotary control of N button during a telephone call.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i
왘
Enter desired telephone number using
buttons 1 to R.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only twelve of these are visible in
the display.
컄컄
The volume can be adjusted separately
for telephone mode and audio mode.
241
Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄 왘
왘
i
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
This is only possible, however, when
the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not
transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored
in the phone book.
After correct telephone number has
been entered, press s button.
i
If the telephone number has been
saved together with a name in the
phone book, the name will appear in
the display.
Phone book
앫
Searching and calling up phone book
entries by name.
242
Press MEM soft key or press
‚ or ƒ.
왘
Press desired numerical key 2
to 9.
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of
the initial letters (e.g. for S -Smith,
press button 7 four times).
or
왘
You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book with the audio system. You can access both the main
entries and the sub-entries of your
phone book.
Press and hold button
‚ or ƒ.
The system jumps from one initial
letter to the next in ascending or
descending order.
The numbers stored in the phone book of
the mobile telephone can be called up either by name or number.
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
phone book.
왘
왘
or
Press and hold button
‚ or ƒ until desired initial
letter has been reached.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
왘
Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been
reached.
The stored entries are selected in
alphabetical order with the sub-entries.
앫
i
Several sub-entries can be stored for
each main entry (name). These entries
are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper
left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries
are possible:
CEL = Mobile phone
HOM = Home
WOR = Work
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
왘
Press MEM soft key or press
‚ or ƒ.
The call will be made.
왘
Press RCV soft key (received calls).
The number of received calls and
then the call last received appear
briefly in the display.
Viewing the telephone number of a
phone book entry
왘
Search for desired entry.
왘
Press NUM soft key.
왘
The telephone number of the phone
book entry appears in the display.
앫
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
The letter R and the number of the
memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
The numbers are stored in the order
of the calls received.
Returning calls received
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
The call will be made.
243
Controls in detail
Audio system
앫
Speed dial
Redial
If you have stored telephone numbers
as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio unit.
If the number you have dialed is busy, you
can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial
function.
왘
왘
Press desired button 1 to R
briefly.
If you have activated the automatic redial function on your mobile telephone,
the number of the person being called
is automatically redialed after a short
waiting period if there is a busy signal.
Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone.
Press s button.
Turbo dial
If you have stored telephone numbers
as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio unit.
왘
244
Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
Press s button.
The telephone number last dialed
will appear in the display.
왘
i
The call will be made.
앫
왘
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
The letter L and the number of the
memory position appears in the
left-hand corner of the display. The
numbers are stored in the order of
the calls made.
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
The call will be made.
앫
Manual redial
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call
Muting a call
Accepting a second incoming call
If the telephone is active in the background
(reception symbol is visible in the display),
the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be
heard and the caller’s telephone number,
or the name under which the telephone
number has been saved in the telephone
book, appears in the display. If the caller’s
number is not relayed, CALL will appear in
the display.
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.
왘
Press s button.
The call is accepted.
앫
Mute on
왘
Press MUT soft key.
왘 MIC MUTE will
앫
appear in the display.
Mute off
왘
Press MUT soft key again.
Terminating a call
왘
Press t button.
The current call is terminated and the
muted audio source becomes active
again.
앫
Accepting a second call
왘
Place new call by entering telephone number manually.
i
You will be notified of the second call
acoustically, but you will not see this in
the display.
You are connected to the second
caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
245
Controls in detail
Audio system
앫
Switching between calls
왘
Press s button.
This switches between the calls.
The non-active call is kept on hold.
앫
Terminating a call
왘
Press t button.
The current call is terminated. The
connection to the caller previously
kept on hold is also interrupted;
however, reconnection is indicated
by an acoustic signal.
Placing a second call
앫
왘
If you wish to place another call during an
already active call, you can place the second call and switch between the callers or
combine them into one call. Note that this
feature is dependent on availability from
your mobile phone service provider.
앫
Placing a second call
왘
Place a new call by entering telephone number manually.
왘
Press s button.
You are connected to the second
caller; the first caller is kept on
hold.
Terminating a call
Press t button.
The current call is terminated. The
connection to the caller previously
kept on hold is also interrupted;
however, reconnection is indicated
by an acoustic signal.
앫
Combining two calls
왘
Press s button.
The calls are combined into one
call.
앫
Terminating a combined call
왘
Press t button.
The connection to both callers is
terminated.
246
Controls in detail
Audio system
Emergency calls “911”
The following conditions must be met for a
“911” emergency call:
The following describes how to dial a “911”
emergency call using the audio system
head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified
mobile phone* is inserted in the phone
cradle*. Unless otherwise specified, the
descriptions refer to the audio system
head unit.
Consult the separate telephone operating
instructions that came with your mobile
phone* for information on how to place a
“911” emergency call on the mobile
phone*.
Warning!
G
The “911” emergency call system is a public
service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense.
GSM network phones
앫
Telephone must be switched on.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone locked
앫
The corresponding mobile communications network must be available.
왘
i
Emergency calls may not be possible
with all telephone networks or if certain
network services and/or telephone
functions are active. Check with your
local service providers.
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
PIN? appears in the audio display.
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press OK soft key or s button for
dialing to begin.
DIALING appears in the audio display
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
247
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone unlocked
왘
왘
왘
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
TDMA/CDMA network phones
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone locked
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
Press s button for dialing to begin.
왘
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin.
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
i
If no SIM card is in the mobile phone,
NO SERVICE appears in the audio display. In that case, you only can make an
emergency call on the mobile phone itself, without the use of the head unit.
248
왘
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press s button for dialing to begin.
CODE? appears in the audio display.
DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone unlocked
DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The side windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all the side
windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
side trim panels.
G
When closing the windows, make sure there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The closing of the rear side windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch.
1 Left front window
2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 85)
The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the
resistance point and released it to close the
window, the automatic reversal function will
stop the window and open it slightly.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing
and holding the lock button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle,
by operating the soft top switch, or by pressing and holding button , or e on
the climate control panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
249
Controls in detail
Power windows
i
i
Opening the windows
You can also open or close the windows using the:
Operating the rear side windows from
the rear is not possible if you activate
the override switch (컄 page 85).
왘
앫
Soft top switch (컄 page 254).
앫
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature) (컄 page 252).
앫
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter
switch, the power windows can be
operated:
the air recirculation button , in
the control panel of the climate
control (컄 page 187) or automatic
climate control (컄 page 197) is
pressed and held
or
앫
250
the charcoal filter button e in
the control panel of the automatic
climate control (컄 page 197) is
pressed and held.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
i
Depending on current position, the windows may also open or close when:
왘
앫
until you open the driver’s or passenger’s door.
앫
for at least five minutes.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
point.
Closing the windows
왘
Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning!
G
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully opening the door windows
(Express-open)
왘
Press switch 1 or 2 past the
resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens
completely.
Fully closing the door windows
(Express-close)
왘
Pull switch 1 or 2 past the
resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes
completely.
!
If the upward movement of a door window is blocked during the closing procedure, the door window will stop and
open slightly.
Remove the obstruction, pull the
switch again past the resistance point
and release.
If the door window still does not close
when there is no obstruction, then pull
the switch and hold it. The door window
will then close without the obstruction
sensor function.
Warning!
G
Driver's door only:
If within five seconds you again pull the
switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not function.
Stopping windows during
Express-operation
왘
Press or pull the respective power window switch again.
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be resynchronized each time
앫
after the battery has been
disconnected.
앫
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
Pull the power window switches until
the side windows are closed.
왘
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
The power windows are synchronized.
251
Controls in detail
Power windows
i
Summer opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows or soft top if
there is the possibility of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the button
on the SmartKey. To reverse direction of
movement, press Πfor opening or
‹ for closing.
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
앫
opening the side windows
앫
opening the soft top
앫
turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s sear
252
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
왘
Press and hold button Πafter
unlocking the vehicle.
The seat ventilation* for the driver’s
seat is automatically set to the highest
level if activated via summer opening
feature.
The windows and soft top begin to
open after approximately one second.
왘
Release the Πbutton to interrupt
procedure.
Make sure the soft top is fully opened.
If the opening procedure is finished, the
multifunction display will briefly show the
message Top open.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Convenience closing feature
Warning!
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
G
When closing the side windows and the
soft top, make sure that there is no danger
of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
The windows will not automatically re-open
if blocked during convenience closing.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release button ‹ to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
앫
앫
Release the lock button (컄 page 60) on
exterior door handle to stop the closing
procedure.
Pull on the exterior door handle and hold
firmly. The side windows and the soft
top will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened.
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the windows and soft top simultaneously.
왘
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle
(컄 page 252). The SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
in close proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
Press and hold button ‹ until the
windows and soft top are completely
closed.
The windows and soft top begin to
close after approximately one second.
왘
Release button ‹ to interrupt procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the
soft top are properly closed before leaving
the vehicle.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (컄 page 60) until
the side windows are completely
closed.
왘
Release the lock button on the outside
door handle to interrupt procedure.
253
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing all side windows
with the soft top switch
The soft top switch is located in the center
console.
Warning!
G
As an alternate method to using the power
window switches, all side windows can be
opened or closed using the soft top
switch 1.
254
왘
Never operate the windows if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the soft top switch. To open
the windows again, press the soft top switch
twice. Press the switch briefly the first time.
Then press the switch a second time and
hold it until the side windows have reached
the desired position.
1 Soft top switch
Opening
왘
Switch on the ignition.
Press soft top switch 1 twice. Press
the switch briefly the first time. Then
press the switch a second time and
hold it until the side windows have
reached the desired position.
Closing
왘
Pull soft top switch 1 twice. Pull the
switch briefly the first time. Then pull
the switch a second time and hold it
until the side windows have reached
the desired position.
Controls in detail
Soft top
왔 Soft top
Opening and closing the soft top
Warning!
For safety reasons, the soft top can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
standing still.
Warning!
G
Before operating the switch for the soft top,
make sure no persons can be injured by the
moving parts (roll bars, soft top frame, and
soft top compartment cover).
Hands must never be placed near the roll
bar, soft top frame, upper windshield area,
shelf behind roll bar, or soft top storage
compartment while the soft top is being
raised or lowered. Serious personal injury
may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the soft
top switch. This immediately interrupts the
raising or lowering procedure. You then can
operate the soft top switch to raise or lower
the soft top away from the danger zone.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
!
When opening and closing the soft top,
make sure:
앫
there is sufficient clearance for the
soft top to move up
앫
the luggage cover is engaged in
place (컄 page 262)
앫
the trunk is only loaded to the
height of the luggage cover
앫
the luggage/cargo does not push
the closed luggage cover up
앫
the trunk lid is closed
앫
nothing is placed on the soft top
compartment cover
앫
the outside temperature is above
+5°F (-15°C)
!
Never sit or place heavy objects on the
rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to the soft top and the rear shelf.
Otherwise the soft top and other parts
of the vehicle could be damaged.
255
Controls in detail
Soft top
Opening the soft top
1 Soft top, opening
Before pulling on the soft top switch, you
must make sure:
앫
the parking brake is engaged
(컄 page 50)
앫
the luggage cover is latched, see
“Latch luggage cover” (컄 page 262)
앫
the trunk lid is closed
앫
the ignition is switched on (컄 page 36)
256
i
The soft top cannot be opened using
the soft top switch when the roll bars
have been released. The roll bars need
to be lowered before the soft top can
be operated again using the soft top
switch. If the roll bars have released
and the soft top is closed, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
have the roll bars lowered. Do not attempt to lower the roll bars manually
with the soft top closed. Lowering the
roll bars manually with the soft top
closed may impair the function of the
roll bars (컄 page 423).
If the roll bars have released and the
soft top is open, you can lower the roll
bars manually (컄 page 424) or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
to have the roll bars lowered.
왘
Pull up on the soft top switch as indicated by the arrow 1 until the soft top
is completely lowered into its trunk
storage compartment.
During the opening procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
If the opening procedure is finished,
the multifunction display will briefly
show the message Top open.
If you continuously pull on the soft top
switch, the windows will close.
However, the windows can also be
closed/opened later on, for more information see “Opening and closing all side windows with the soft top switch”
(컄 page 254), or see “Opening and closing
the windows” (컄 page 249).
Controls in detail
Soft top
i
For safety reasons, the soft top cannot
be opened while driving.
Make sure the soft top is dry before you
open it. Otherwise water may enter the
trunk interior.
!
To prevent mildew, the soft top must be
dry before lowering it into the storage
compartment.
Do not lower a frozen soft top until
thawed and dry. Lowering a frozen soft
top may result in damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Warning!
G
Closing the soft top
Do not place anything on the soft top compartment cover.
The soft top compartment cover must never
be used by any persons as a seat bench.
Raising of the roll bars could result in serious personal injury.
1 Soft top, closing
Before pressing the soft top switch, you
must make sure:
앫
the parking brake is engaged
(컄 page 50)
앫
the trunk lid is closed
앫
the ignition is switched on (컄 page 36)
257
Controls in detail
Soft top
왘
Press the soft top switch as indicated
by the arrow 1 until the soft top is
completely closed and locked.
During the closing procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
If the soft top is closed and locked, the
multifunction display will briefly show
the message Top closed.
If you continuously press on the soft
top switch the windows will close.
However, the windows can also be
closed/opened later on, for more information see “Opening and closing all side windows with the soft top switch”
(컄 page 254) or see “Opening and closing
the windows” (컄 page 249).
i
For safety reasons, the soft top cannot
be closed while driving.
258
i
The soft top cannot be closed using the
soft top switch when the roll bars have
been released. The roll bars need to be
lowered before the soft top can be operated again using the soft top switch.
If the roll bars have released and the
soft top is open, you can lower the roll
bars manually (컄 page 424) or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
to have the roll bars lowered.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the soft top either completely
closed and locked, or fully lowered into its
storage compartment.
If the soft top does not completely open or
close, a warning sounds. In the multifunction display you will see K, and the message Top being lowered appears. After
about 15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose
pressure.
Properly lock the soft top (컄 page 259) before continuing to drive.
Controls in detail
Soft top
Locking the soft top after raising/lowering
Warning!
G
Unlocked status noticed when stopped
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
To lock the soft top in its fully closed
position, press soft top switch.
The message Top closed will be shown
in the multifunction display.
The soft top is not fully closed and locked or
not fully opened if:
앫
the message Top in operation is
shown in the multifunction display
앫
a warning sounds for 10 seconds and
the message Lock top is shown in the
multifunction display when starting to
drive
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the soft top either completely
closed and locked, or fully lowered into its
storage compartment.
If the soft top is not properly locked, lock it
as described below.
or:
왘
To lock the soft top in its fully opened
position, pull up on the soft top switch.
The message Top open will be shown in
the multifunction display.
Unlocked status noticed while driving
Warning!
G
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and lock the soft top before continuing to drive. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Leave the ignition switched on.
왘
To lock the soft top in its fully closed
position, press soft top switch.
The message Top closed will be shown
in the multifunction display.
or:
왘
To lock the soft top in its fully opened
position, pull up on the soft top switch.
The message Top open will be shown in
the multifunction display.
259
Controls in detail
Soft top
Warning!
G
If the soft top does not completely open or
close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure
and the soft top is lowered
앫
after approximately seven minutes
when the ignition is switched on.
앫
after approximately 15 seconds when
the ignition is switched off.
Shortly before the soft top is lowered, a
warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see K, and the message Top
being lowered appears.
앫
Properly lock the soft top (컄 page 259)
before continuing to drive.
Opening and closing the soft top with
the SmartKey
The windows will also be opened or closed
when you operate the soft top with the
SmartKey.
Warning!
G
Before operating the soft top, make sure no
persons can be injured by the moving parts
(roll bar, soft top frame, and soft top compartment cover) due to negligence.
Hands must never be placed near the roll
bar, soft top frame, upper windshield area,
shelf behind roll bar, or soft top storage
compartment while the soft top is being
raised or lowered. Serious personal injury
may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the respective button on the SmartKey. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering
procedure. You then can operate Πto
lower or ‹ to raise the soft top away
from the danger zone.
260
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
Controls in detail
Soft top
Opening (Summer opening feature)
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
왘
왘
Press and hold button Πuntil the
soft top is completely open.
Press and hold button ‹ until the
soft top is completely closed.
The windows and soft top begin to
open after approximately one second.
The windows and soft top begin to
close after approximately one second.
During the opening procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
During the closing procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top in operation.
If the opening procedure is finished,
the multifunction display will briefly
show the message Top open.
If the soft top is closed and locked, the
multifunction display will briefly show
the message Top closed.
Release transmit button Πto interrupt procedure.
Make sure the soft top is fully opened.
왘
Warning!
G
If the soft top does not completely open or
close, a warning sounds and the soft top
switch flashes. In the multifunction display
you will see K, and the message Top
being lowered appears. After about
15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose pressure.
Properly lock the soft top (컄 page 259) before continuing to drive.
Release transmit button ‹ to interrupt procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the
soft top are properly closed before leaving
the vehicle.
261
Controls in detail
Soft top
Luggage cover
The luggage cover is located in the trunk.
Folding back luggage cover
!
왘
Never place anything behind the side
nets when the luggage cover has been
folded back. You could forget about objects placed there, which could result
in damage when operating the soft top.
Press luggage cover 1 in direction of
rear seat.
!
To prevent damage to the soft top or
luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:
1 Luggage cover
왘
Open the trunk
Latch luggage cover
왘
Pull luggage cover 1 out in direction
of arrow until it engages in place.
262
앫
load trunk only to the height of the
luggage cover
앫
do not permit luggage/cargo to
push up the closed luggage cover
앫
do not place anything on the shelf
behind the roll bars
앫
do not place anything on the soft
top compartment cover
Controls in detail
Soft top
Wind screen
Installing
왘
Warning!
G
Remove the wind screen from its storage bag.
The wind screen can restrict the driver’s vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a
possible accident when visibility is limited
(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
screen should be folded back.
The wind screen deflects drafts away from
the driver and passenger when the soft top
is lowered. It is stored in a separate storage bag in the trunk.
3 Catch
4 Retainer claw
5 Snap fastener
1 Upper section
2 Lower section
왘
Fold sections 1 and 2 together.
왘
Press retainer claw 4 on upper section into snap fastener 5 of lower section.
컄컄
263
Controls in detail
Soft top
왘
컄컄
왘
Pull catch 8 back and guide left retaining pin into mounting fixture on left
side.
Fold upper section of wind screen up
toward head restraints until it stops.
Warning!
6 Retaining lugs
7 Mounting fixture on right side
8 Catch
왘
Fold retaining lugs 6 out.
왘
Slide pre-assembled wind screen into
mounting fixture on right side 7 using
retaining pin on right side. Simultaneously, retaining lugs 6 should slide
into seat belt passage in rear bench
seat.
264
Removing
왘
Fold upper section of wind screen back
down.
왘
Pull catch 8 back and pull wind
screen out toward front of vehicle. Be
careful not to damage interior trim with
guide tabs.
왘
Fold retaining lugs 6 back.
G
Check for secure locking by pulling up on
the wind screen.
To prevent personal injury, remove wind
screen if rear seats are to be occupied by
passengers.
9 Catch
왘
Press catch 9 and fold upper and lower sections back.
왘
Place the wind screen back into the
bag.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed.
앫
Parktronic* (Canada only), which
serves as a parking assistant.
For information on the BAS, ABS, and ESP®
driving systems, see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 87).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
You can set or resume cruise control at any
speed over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄 page 22).
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
265
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the cruise control system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
- your foot could become caught.
Keep in mind that cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver
during vehicle operation. The driver is and
must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume to last set speed
Setting current speed
Warning!
G
Cruise control brakes automatically so that
the set speed is not exceeded. The brake
pedal depresses when the cruise control engages the brakes.
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever (컄 page 266).
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
266
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.
i
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
will hold the set speed with braking
from the vehicle’s brake system.
In addition, on longer downhill grades
the automatic transmission will automatically downshift.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling cruise control
i
!
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
Cruise control automatically switched
off, if
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
앫
you step on the brake pedal.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
앫
you press the parking brake pedal.
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
In this case the segments in the
multifunction display (컄 page 266)
go out and no warning sounds.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
앫
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
앫
ESP® is in operation or switched off
with the ESP® switch (컄 page 90).
앫
you move the gear selector lever to
position N while driving.
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
The segments in the multifunction display (컄 page 266) go out, and an
acoustic warning sounds.
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
왘
왘
Lift the cruise control lever in direction
of arrow 1 (컄 page 266) and hold it
up until the desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 266).
The new speed is set.
Slower
Setting a lower speed
왘
왘
Depress the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 266) and
hold it down until the desired speed is
reached.
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 266).
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and others.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the brake system will
automatically brake the vehicle if the
engine’s braking power does not brake
the vehicle sufficiently.
268
Briefly push cruise control lever to
position 4 (컄 page 266).
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
The new speed is set.
i
G
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated
(컄 page 266).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking assist)*,
Canada only
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system*
(Canada only) sensors” (컄 page 369).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash,
or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the
system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.
Warning!
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Parktronic system deactivates at
speeds over approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
system turns on again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you place the gear selector lever in
position P.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition
(컄 page 34) and placed the gear selector
lever in position D, R, or N.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors
!
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system*
(Canada only) sensors” (컄 page 369).
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
Front sensors
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
270
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the
rear dome lighting.
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
Each warning indicator is divided into six
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
system is ready when the border around
the indicator is illuminated.
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Gear selector lever position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
P
Neither activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the
eighth distance segment illuminates, you
have reached the minimum distance.
앫
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of two seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P.
앫
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of two seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D or P.
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
Switching on the Parktronic system
왘
The Parktronic system can be switched off
manually.
Press Parktronic switch 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i
The Parktronic switch is located in the upper part of the center console (컄 page 27).
The Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is
switched on (컄 page 34).
Parktronic system malfunction
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp
Switching off the Parktronic system
왘
Press Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
272
If only the red distance segments illuminate and a acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.
왘
Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
If only the red distance segments illuminate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
there is an interference from other radio or
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 34).
왘
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 369).
왘
Switch on the ignition.
or
왘
Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Ski sack* (Canada only)
Unfolding and loading
왘
Close soft top completely
(컄 page 257).
왘
Open the trunk.
왘
Fold luggage cover back in direction of
the arrow.
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
4 Handle
5 Cover
6 Armrest
왘
Pull ski sack roller blind upward using
pull strap 3.
왘
Fold armrest 6 down (arrow).
왘
Manually fold left 1 and right
hinges 2 of ski sack roller blind all the
way up.
왘
Pull handle 4 and swing cover 5
down.
273
컄컄
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
7 Hook and loop fastener
왘
Unfasten hook and loop fastener 7.
왘
Pull ski sack into passenger compartment and unfold.
8 Flap
9 Catch
왘
Pull down catch 9.
왘
Open the flap 8 downwards in the direction of the arrow.
왘
From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
Warning!
G
The ski sack is designed for up to two pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
274
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding
a Strap
왘
Tighten strap a by pulling at the loose
end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack
are tightly secured.
b Hook
c Eye
왘
Connect hook b to eye c located on
center tunnel in front of rear seat
bench.
왘
Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).
왘
Loosen both straps.
왘
Disconnect hook b from eye c.
왘
Unload skis.
왘
Close flap 8 in trunk.
왘
Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
왘
Place folded ski sack inside recess of
backrest.
왘
Fasten hook and loop fastener.
왘
Close ski sack compartment cover.
275
Controls in detail
Loading
Closing ski sack roller blind
왘
왘
To snap ski sack roller blind into place,
press left and right hinges where the
word PRESS can be seen.
Fold luggage cover back and close it
securely (컄 page 262).
Removing the ski sack
For ski sack removal, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning!
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
왘
왘
Pull ski sack roller blind downward using pull strap 3.
Manually fold left 1 and right
hinges 2 of ski sack roller blind all the
way down.
276
G
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
i
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always close the
flap.
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity
weight indicated on the corresponding
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 333).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
!
To prevent damage to the soft top or
luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:
앫
load trunk only to the height of the
luggage cover
앫
do not permit luggage/cargo to
push up the closed luggage cover
앫
do not place anything on the shelf
behind the roll bar
앫
do not place anything on the soft
top compartment cover
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
277
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
Storage compartments
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
Glove box
Make sure no objects fall into the openings of the subwoofer between the rear
seats.
If necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to remove any
objects which may have fallen into the
openings.
1 Glove box lid
2 Glove box lid release
Opening the glove box
왘
Pull glove box lid release 2.
The glove box lid 1 opens downward.
Closing the glove box
왘
Push glove box lid 1 up to close.
i
Audio system/COMAND* with CD
changer*: The CD changer* is located
in the glove box.
278
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage box (Center armrest design A)
The storage box is in front of the armrest
storage compartment.
Warning!
G
Do not use this storage compartment as an
ashtray and/or place hot cigarettes or other
hot smoking materials in the storage box.
Placing such materials in the storage box
may cause vehicle damage and/or potentially cause a vehicle fire.
Opening storage box
왘
Pull storage box 1 in the direction of
arrow.
Closing storage box
왘
Press storage box 1 back until it
engages into place.
1 Storage box
279
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ruffled storage bags
Warning!
G
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
The ruffled storage bag is intended for storing light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
ruffled storage bag. In an accident, during
hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they
could be thrown around inside the vehicle
and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
1 Ruffled storage bags
Storage bags are located on the rear side
of the front seats.
280
The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an
accident.
1 Parcel net
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Center armrest
Depending on vehicle production date,
your vehicle is equipped with either armrest design A or B
Opening storage compartment
왘
Pull handle 1 and lift armrest.
Closing storage compartment
왘
Armrest design A
Press armrest down until it engages
into place.
Opening telephone compartment
왘
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
Press button 3 on driver’s side or
button 2 on passenger side and lift
armrest.
Closing telephone compartment
왘
Press armrest down until it engages
into place.
1 Handle
2 Button (passenger side)
3 Button (driver side)
4 Compartment lock (lock position)
5 Compartment lock (unlock position)
281
Controls in detail
Useful features
Locking compartment
Armrest design B
왘
Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 419).
왘
Turn the compartment lock to
position 5.
The compartment in the center armrest
contains a cup holder and the telephone*
compartment.
Opening compartment
Unlocking compartment
왘
Turn the compartment lock to
position 4.
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the
SmartKey.
1 Cover
왘
1 Cover
2 Telephone* compartment
3 Cup holder
282
Slide cover 1 in direction of arrow.
Closing compartment
왘
Slide cover 1 back.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening telephone compartment
왘
Slide cover 1 in direction of arrow and
open it fully.
Armrest in the rear passenger
compartment
Warning!
Closing telephone compartment
왘
Cup holders
Slide cover 1 back.
왘
Pull the top of the armrest out and fold
it down.
G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you and others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident.
컄컄
283
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
Keep in mind that objects placed in cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Cup holder in the dashboard
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Cup holder in the center armrest
Only vehicles with center armrest design B
(컄 page 282).
1 Cover
Opening cup holder
왘
Push cover 1.
The cup holder opens automatically.
Closing cup holder
왘
1 Cup holder in compartment
(컄 page 282)
2 Cup holder
284
Push the cup holder back until it
engages.
1 Cover plate
2 Sliding button
3 Ashtray insert
Opening ashtray
왘
Briefly press the bottom of cover
plate 1.
The cover plate opens automatically.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
왘
Secure vehicle from movement by
setting the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position N.
왘
Push the ashtray insert 3 down into
the retainer until it engages.
왘
Push down cover plate 1 to close
ashtray.
Rear seat ashtray
The cover plate engages.
1 Button
2 Ashtray insert
3 Cover
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘
Push sliding button 2 to the right.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way in direction of arrow 3.
왘
Remove the ashtray insert.
285
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening ashtray
왘
Pull at top of cover 3.
Removing ashtray insert
왘
Push button 1 to disengage ashtray
insert 2 and remove it.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘
왘
Cigarette lighter
Push the ashtray insert 2 down into
the retainer until it engages.
Push at top of cover 3 to close
ashtray.
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
1 Cover
2 Cigarette lighter
왘
The cover plate opens automatically.
왘
왘
Briefly press the bottom of cover
plate 1.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
Push in cigarette lighter 2.
The cigarette lighter will pop out
automatically when hot.
왘
Push down cover plate 1 to close
ashtray.
The cover plate engages.
286
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
The lighter socket can accommodate
12V DC electrical accessories (up to a
maximum of 85 W) designed for use
with the standard “cigarette lighter”
plug type. Keep in mind, however, that
connecting accessories to the lighter
socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs
that do not fit properly) can damage the
lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be able
to be placed in the heating (pushed-in)
position, or the lighter may pop out too
early with the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette
lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
power outlet (컄 page 287) in your vehicle whenever possible.
Power outlet in the rear passenger
compartment
1 Power outlet
2 Cover
Floormats*
Removing
왘
Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2 in
direction of arrow 1.
왘
Remove the floormats.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
Pull at top of cover 2.
왘
Flip cover 1 to the left and insert
electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).
Installing
왘
Lay down the floormat.
i
왘
Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto retainer pins 5 in direction of arrow 3.
The power outlet can be used to
accommodate electrical consumers
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a
maximum of 180 W.
287
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 4 and retainer
pins 5.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
288
G
Only operate the audio system or COMAND* (Cockpit Management and Data
System)1 if road, weather an traffic conditions permit.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Tele Aid
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid
system may only be performed by
completing the subscriber agreement
and placing an acquaintance call using
the ¡ button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated.
You can take and place telephone calls
using the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 163).
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫
automatic and manual emergency
앫
roadside assistance and
앫
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and
cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç. The volume can also be
adjusted using the volume knob on your
audio system or COMAND* head unit.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
i
The SOS button is located above the
interior rear view mirror.
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest
cover.
289
Controls in detail
Useful features
Shortly after the completion of your
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive
a user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
i
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals is unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
System self-check
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than ten seconds or do not come on). The
290
message Tele Aid malfunction Drive to
workshop appears in the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or message
Tele Aid malfunction Drive to
workshop is displayed in the multifunction
display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically following an accident in
which the emergency tensioning devices
(ETDs) or air bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See (컄 page 291) for
instructions on initiating an emergency call
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Connecting call
appears in the multifunction display and
the audio system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message
Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite
location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
emergency provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
앫
it has been activated and is
operational. Activation requires a
subscription for monitoring services,
connection and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the
Response Center.
Warning!
G
Initiating an emergency call manually
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
ten seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
컄컄
291
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 왘
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
Warning!
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located below the center armrest cover.
왘
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they
receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle
occupants.
Press and hold the • button (for
longer than two seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The • button will flash while the call
is in progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
multifunction display and the audio
system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘
292
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may
apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance
manual for more information.
The following is only available in the USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
i
The indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately ten
seconds during the system self-check
after switching on the ignition (together
with the SOS button and the Information button ¡).
Controls in detail
Useful features
See system self-check (컄 page 290)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than
approximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • is flashing
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be
terminated using the t button on
the multifunction steering wheel or the
respective button for ending a
telephone call on the audio system or
the COMAND* headunit.
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located below the center armrest cover.
왘
Press and hold the ¡ button (for
longer than two seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display and the
audio system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be
established. Information regarding the
operation of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you
separately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approximately ten seconds during
the system self-check after switching
on ignition (together with the SOS
button and the Roadside Assistance
button •).
See System self-check (컄 page 290)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than
approximately ten seconds.
293
Controls in detail
Useful features
If the indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously
and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not
available). The message Call failed
appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated
using the t button on the
multifunction steering wheel or the
respective button for ending a
telephone call on the audio system or
the COMAND* headunit.
294
!
i
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
malfunction or the service is not
currently active, and may not initiate a
call. Visit an Mercedes-Benz Center
and have the system checked or
contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by
a Response Center or Customer
Assistance Center representative
except Roadside Assistance and
Information calls, which can also be
terminated by pressing button t
on the multifunction steering wheel or
the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the audio system or
the COMAND* head unit.
Call priority
!
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In
this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA), or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA, or
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
in Canada.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Remote door unlock
i
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the audio system or the COMAND*
system audio is muted and the
selected mode (radio or CD) pauses.
The optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If you must use this
phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call. The COMAND* navigation
system (if engaged) will continue to
run. The display in the instrument
cluster is available for use, and spoken
commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND*
headunit. A pop-up window will appear
in the COMAND* display to indicate
that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
The remote door unlock feature is
available if the relevant cellular phone
network is available.
왘
The SOS button will flash and the
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display to indicate
receipt of the door unlock command.
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
Once the vehicle is unlocked,
a Response Center specialist will
attempt to establish voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the trunk
recessed handle again.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
295
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener*
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as
garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or
some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control
1
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of vehicle equipment):
5
Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator
or other device
6
Hand-held remote control button
i
When the anti-theft alarm or the
tow-away alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center, see “Anti-theft alarm system” (컄 page 92) and
tow-away alarm (컄 page 94).
296
Indicator lamp
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and
inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and
possible death.
Programming the integrated remote
control
Step 1:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed an
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when the indicator lamp 1
begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory.
컄컄
297
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.
Step 3:
왘
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping the indicator
lamp 1 in view.
298
Step 4:
Step 5:
왘
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is completed.
The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly.
After the indicator lamp 1 changes
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
button and the signal transmitter button.
Step 6:
왘
i
Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe the indicator lamp 1.
The indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button
has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Rolling code programming
Step 9:
If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly
for about 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as
your garage door opener may be
equipped with the “rolling code”
feature.
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
왘
Step 7:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Step 8:
왘
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following two steps.
Step 10:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
operator’s manual.
Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.
Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training
process.
컄컄
299
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
i
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code equipped devices) may
require you to press, hold for 2 seconds
and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the
training process.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Step 12:
왘
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Step 4:
왘
300
Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.
왘
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
왘
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Upon completion of programming the
integrated remote control, make sure
you retain the hand-held remote control that came with the garage door
opener, gate operator or other device.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an
integrated remote control, or simply for
continued use as a hand-held remote
control to operate the respective
device in other situations.
Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘
The indicator lamp 1 will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with
step 3.
Operation of integrated remote control
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
301
Controls in detail
Useful features
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
Simultaneously press and hold down
the outer signal transmitter buttons 2
and 4, for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
302
Programming tips
앫
While performing step 3, hold the
hand-held remote control 6 at different lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
앫
If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.
앫
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
앫
앫
Check the frequency of the hand-held
remote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating
between 288-399 MHz.
Put a new battery in the hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the
likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate
signal to the integrated remote control.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
i
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
remote control. If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center, or call Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(1) This device may not cause
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
303
304
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
305
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫
306
Select mode C as the preferred shift
program (컄 page 172) for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
!
Additional instructions for AMG
vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when
driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
after the engine or the rear differential has
been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended tire
inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning!
G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
Power assistance
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
307
Operation
Driving instructions
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
308
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subject to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 88).
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
High-performance brake system
(CLK 55 AMG only)
The high-performance brake system is designed to operate under the extremely high
operating demands required to accommodate the performance capabilities of the
vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeaking-type noise depending on the
앫
vehicle speed
!
앫
brake force applied
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
앫
ambient conditions, e.g. temperature
and humidity
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream can cool down
the brakes faster.
As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as
brake pads or discs strongly depends on
your driving style and the conditions under
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style calling for high demand braking
will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
more quickly.
Warning!
G
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and replacement brake pads and discs may take
several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
that time, you may need to use increased
brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
be aware of this and adjust your driving and
braking accordingly during this break-in
period.
Excessive high demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is
important to maintain the brake system and
have it checked regularly.
309
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off
Parking
Warning!
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine gradually. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake wear and drivetrain
wear.
310
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
G
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires
Warning!
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high
ambient temperatures).
311
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
312
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄 page 359) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use
prudent driving speeds appropriate to
prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Operation
Driving instructions
CLK 350, CLK 500
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
CLK 55 AMG
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i
For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 360).
i
For information on tire speed rating for
winter tires, see “Winter tires”
(컄 page 359).
For additional general information on
tire speed markings on the sidewall,
see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 346).
Warning!
G
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
313
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 359).
314
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake, causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Telephones* and two-way radios
Warning!
G
COMAND*, radio and telephone*
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
315
Operation
Driving instructions
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our
recommended maintenance instructions
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
316
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay, or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments to the engine should therefore
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to
approximately 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
317
Operation
At the gas station
왘
Refueling
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could
result in personal injury.
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
318
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow 1.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
왘
Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
왘
Take off cap and set it in direction of
arrow 2 in the recess on the fuel filler
flap.
1 To open the fuel filler flap
2 To insert the fuel filler cap
왘
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Turn the engine off
앫
by turning the SmartKey to
position 0. Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
앫
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button. Open the driver’s door (with driver’s door open,
starter switch is now in position 0,
same as with SmartKey removed
from starter switch).
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or
overfill.
Operation
At the gas station
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
왘
Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
until it audibly engages.
왘
Close fuel filler flap.
i
i
Only use premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ú malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or
the ± malfunction indicator lamp
(Canada only) to illuminate.
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline, see
“Premium unleaded gasoline”
(컄 page 482) or the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 376).
319
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For more information,
see “Coolant” (컄 page 327) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 479).
1 Coolant level
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
3 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
i
Opening the hood, see (컄 page 321).
320
For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
system and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 329).
Brake fluid
Engine oil level
Removing fuse box cover (컄 page 463).
For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 322).
!
Engine compartment (CLK 500, example)
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately. Do not add brake
fluid as this will not solve the problem.
For more information, see also “Practical hints” (컄 page 375).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
“Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 438).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 52).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Recommended
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 339).
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
왘
Hood
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
Pull lever 1 downwards.
왘
Push lever 2 on the hood upwards.
The hood is unlocked.
왘
Pull up on the hood and then release it.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Opening
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning!
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The hood lock release lever is located to
the left of the steering wheel under the
dashboard.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
2 Lever for opening the hood
1 Hood lock release lever
321
컄컄
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
322
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘
왘
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
i
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Operation
Engine compartment
i
Checking engine oil level with the
control system
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
When checking the oil level
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with
the engine turned off
앫
with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the
multifunction display, do the following:
왘
앫
Engine oil level
ok
앫
Add 1.0 qt.
to reach max. oil level
(Canada: 1.0 liter)
앫
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
The standard display (컄 page 144) should
appear in the multifunction display.
왘
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the multifunction display:
Press buttonk or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the following message is seen in the
multifunction display:
앫
Add 1.5 qt.
to reach max. oil level
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil, see (컄 page 325).
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 479) and
(컄 page 481).
Other display messages
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
in the starter switch, the following
message will appear:
(Canada: 1.5 liter)
Turn on ignition
to see engine oil level
Add 2.0 qt.
to reach max. oil level
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
(Canada: 2.0 liter)
323
Operation
Engine compartment
If you see the message:
Observe waiting time
왘
왘
If engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before repeating check
procedure.
If engine is not at operating
temperature yet, wait 30 minutes
before repeating check procedure.
If you see the message:
Engine oil level
Not when engine on
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
If the engine is at operating
temperature, wait 5 minutes before
checking oil.
왘
If the engine is not at operating
temperature yet, you must wait
30 minutes before checking oil.
324
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at operating temperature, the following
message will appear:
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
왘
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, CLK 350
When checking the oil level
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground.
앫
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the
engine turned off.
앫
with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
with the engine turned off.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 401).
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between the lower (min) mark 3 and
upper (max) mark 2 of oil dipstick 1.
i
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper (max) mark
3 Lower (min) mark
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 321).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1.
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
dipstick guide tube.
The filling quantity between the upper
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine oil” (컄 page 325).
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 479).
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 401).
Adding engine oil
!
Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet in your vehicle
literature portfolio, or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those
expressly required for the Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
325
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
CLK 350
1 Filler cap
왘
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 479) and (컄 page 481).
CLK 500, CLK 55 AMG
1 Filler cap
326
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the automatic transmission.
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant
앫
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
왘
Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly
approximately one half turn to the left
to release any excess pressure.
왘
Continue turning the cap 2 to the left
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the marking
(plastic bridge) inside the reservoir
앫
G
for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
왘
Replace and tighten cap 2.
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 484).
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if the coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow the coolant
to cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine
compartment.
Warning!
1 Coolant expansion tank
2 Cap
327
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
engine compartment on the right-hand
side (컄 page 453).
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated
service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more
frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
328
all safety instructions
Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
G Observe
E
automotive batteries.
A Risk of explosion.
C
Keep children away.
D
F
Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
Keep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
B Battery
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clean
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts,
because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
왘
1 Washer fluid reservoir cap
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 6.4 US qt (6 l).
G
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer
fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system*” (컄 page 486).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below the
freezing point. Failure to do so could
result in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
329
Operation
Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged.
앫
The operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
330
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use Genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. The operating safety of the
vehicle cannot be assured when such tires
are used.
Important guidelines
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure see
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”
(컄 page 339).
Tire inspection
Life of tire
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 332)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn over
time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
331
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths under
1
/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
!
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires
332
!
Cleaning tires
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫
Storing tires
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Loading the vehicle
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
앫
The Tire and Loading Information
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
Information placard (Example B) can be
found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This
placard tells you important information
about the number of people that can be
in the vehicle and the total weight that
can be carried in the vehicle. It also
contains information on the proper size
and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment
tires on your vehicle.
앫
The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The Certification label
also tells you about
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
i
Spare wheels may be mounted against
the direction of rotation (spinning) even
with a unidirectional tire for temporary
use only until the regular drive wheel
has been repaired or replaced. Always
observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel.
the front and rear axle weight capacity,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed
the GVWR or GAWR for either the front
axle or rear axle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the two
placards with regards to loading your vehicle.
333
Operation
Tires and wheels
i
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B).
334
Placard (Example A)
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Load limit data is specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard (Example A),
locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on this placard. The combined weight of all
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue load (if applicable) should never
exceed the weight referenced in that
statement.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
equipped with either placard Example A or
placard Example B located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 333).
i
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle
Tire Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle
Tire Information placard (Example B),
locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on this placard. The combined
weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight listed next to
vehicle capacity weight.
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Seating
data is specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.
Placard (Example A)
1 Seating capacity
Placard (Example B)
1 Seating capacity
335
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit
Step 3
Step 6 (if applicable)
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
왘
왘
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example A)
왘
Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Step 4
왘
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs)
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B)
Step 5
왘
왘
Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.
Step 2
왘
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
336
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 338).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 334).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants and
cargo from
placard
Number of Seating
occupants configura(driver and tion
passengers)
Occupants weight
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
occupants
vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all
occupants)
1
4
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
630 lbs
1500 lbs - 630 lbs = 870 lbs
1500 lbs
front: 2
rear: 2
2
1500 lbs
3
front: 1
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs
1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
3
1500 lbs
1
front:1
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
150 lbs
1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 338).
337
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 338) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄 page 468).
338
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 338) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B) located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 333).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Placard (Example A)
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 340).
i
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Tire data
is specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the illustrations
below. Refer to placard on vehicle for
actual data specific to your vehicle.
339
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
i
Placard (Example B) may list
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for different vehicle loads.
340
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
pressure information for vehicle loads less
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can
be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours or
driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than three hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 339). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
i
If you have overfilled the tire, release
tire inflation pressure by pushing the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of
a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation
pressure with the tire gauge.
컄컄
341
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 왘
왘
Install the valve cap.
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Run Flat Indicator*
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in
the multifunction display.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay if:
앫
snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
앫
winter road conditions prevail
앫
you are driving on a loose surface (e.g.
sand or gravel)
앫
you are driving in a very sporty manner
(involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
342
Warning!
G
When the multifunction display shows the
message Low pres. mode Check tire
Max. speed 50 mph, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. You
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper tire
inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire,
including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified
in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on
the tire placard located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 333). The tire inflation pressures are not listed in the
owner’s manual.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator does not indicate a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected by the Run Flat
Indicator.
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator
왘
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
앫
If you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
If you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
Make sure the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 144).
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:
왘
Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pres. now
OK?
No Yes
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value.
343
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to confirm activation:
왘
Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
reactivated
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press button ç.
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Overinflated tire inflation pressure
Underinflated tire inflation pressure
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
Underinflated tires can:
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
Warning!
or
왘
Overinflated tires can:
Wait until the message
Warning!
Tire pres. now
OK?
No Yes
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
disappears.
344
G
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Operation
Tires and wheels
MOExtended system*
Tire labeling
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*
(컄 page 342).
For information on driving in case of pressure loss in one or more tires (emergency
mode), see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 452).
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 353)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 350)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 351)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 352)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 354)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 346)
8 Load identification (컄 page 349)
9 Tire name
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” (컄 page 471).
345
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
General:
Tire width
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
The tire width 1 (컄 page 346) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 346) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
346
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Aspect ratio
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire code
Tire load rating
The tire code 3 (컄 page 346) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 346) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 348).
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 346) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 351) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs.
Warning!
G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 355) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 349).
i
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 346) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 346) are
also referred to as “service description”.
347
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating
Summer tires
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 346)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
앫
i
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 346) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 346) are
also referred to as “service description”.
348
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 346) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 346).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 346) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 346) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
Index
Q M+S
1
Load identification
Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the
tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) and have
been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions.
1 Load identification
Speed rating
i
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
i
or M+S.for winter tires
349
Operation
Tires and wheels
In addition to tire load rating, special load
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 349).
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
350
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Tire type code
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 350)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
The code 4 (컄 page 350) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Date of manufacture
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 350) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 350)
identifies the week and year of manufacture.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄 page 330).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄 page 350) indicates the
tire size.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
Maximum tire load
1 Maximum tire load rating
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
351
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 347).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 336).
Warning!
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
352
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 339) for proper
tire inflation.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
i
Treadwear
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
353
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
354
Warning!
G
Tire ply material
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bar
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GWV must never exceed the
GWVR indicated on the certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
355
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight and production
options weight.
356
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Tire speed rating
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Vehicle capacity weight
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
357
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 333).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
358
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 333).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 413) and
(컄 page 446).
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(컄 page 486).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure that the engine can be started
even at low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change.
Winter tires
Warning!
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
tires provide special winter performance.
Make sure the tires you use show the
mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements
of the Rubber Manufacturers Association
(RMA) and The Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Use of
winter tires is the only way to achieve the
maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the
ESP® in winter operation.
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.
359
Operation
Winter driving
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP®
(컄 page 90) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicle‘s traction.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block
heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
앫
360
Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions.
앫
Only use snow chains that are
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
!
Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
clearance for snow chains. To help
avoid serious damage to your vehicle or
tires, use of snow chains is not permitted with the following tire sizes:
앫
245/40 R17 91W
앫
245/40 R17 91W MOExtended
앫
T 125/80 R17 99M
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service
indicator.
Maintenance service indicator
message
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Starting approximately 1 month before
your next maintenance service is due, one
of the following messages will appear in
the multifunction display while you are
driving or when you switch on the ignition
(example service A):
The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when your next maintenance service is due.
Service A in XXXXX miles (km)
Service A in XXX days
Service A due now
The type of maintenance service due is
indicated in the multifunction display:
9
½
Basic service (A)
Extended service (B)
i
Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible
Service System) only (Canada vehicles): The interval between
maintenance services depends on your
driving habits. A gentle driving style,
moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
361
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after approximately 30 seconds when you switch on
the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving.
You can also clear it yourself.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 144).
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles
(km)
Service A exceeded by XXX days
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
1 Reset button
왘
Press reset button 1 on the
instrument cluster.
362
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is due.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 144).
왘
Press button k or j until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the service symbol 9 or ½
and the service deadline appears in the
multifunction display.
Operation
Maintenance
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the maintenance
service indicator. To arrive at the true
maintenance service deadline, you will
need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service
indicator message or maintenance service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance
service indicator with the engine oil
level indicator :.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the
maintenance service indicator in the
maintenance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
i
If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance
service has been performed. Resetting
the system without performing the
proper service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will
result in engine damage and/or other
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
363
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subject to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Tar
앫
during winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
앫
To avoid paint damage, you should
immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
364
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others
applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Power washer
!
Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.
Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft
(approximately 1 m), the vehicle could
be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
!
Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
depending on the climate and washing
detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
컄컄
365
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 왘
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the
engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control
linkage bushings and joints should be
lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys
should be protected from any wax.
366
Vehicle washing
Hand-wash
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
왘
Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
왘
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft
(approximately 1 m), the vehicle could
be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘
Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
왘
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.
Operation
Vehicle care
Automatic car wash
i
!
You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic
car washes without brushes are preferable.
After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of
the windshield (컄 page 370). This will
prevent smears and reduce wiping
noise which can be caused by residual
wax on the windshield.
Remove bird droppings immediately.
The organic acid damages the material
and causes the soft top to leak.
When leaving the car wash, make sure
that the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.
Do not use sharp-edged instruments
for the removal of ice and snow.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car
wash.
!
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic
car wash to prevent damage to the
mirrors.
Make sure that the combination switch
is set to 0 (컄 page 53). Otherwise, the
rain sensor could activate and cause
the wipers to move unintentionally.
This may lead to vehicle damage.
Soft top
Clean soft top with soft top raised and
locked. Lower the soft top into the storage
compartment only if the soft top is completely dry. If the soft top is kept in the
storage compartment for a lengthy period,
raise it and air out with the windows open
about every 4 months.
Light colored soft tops should be cleaned
frequently to prevent spots and dirt from
setting in, which could stain and discolor
the soft top material permanently.
Never use a power washer to clean the
soft top, as you may damage the soft
top material.
Never use hot-wax when you run the
vehicle through an automatic car wash,
as you may damage the soft top
material.
i
Depending on the operation mode of
the car wash, there is the possibility of
water drops entering the vehicle’s interior. This is not an indication of a defect
or malfunction in the soft top.
367
Operation
Vehicle care
Dry cleaning:
왘
For cleaning soft top or wind screen never
use:
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth.
Brush the dry top with a soft-bristled
brush.
앫
gasoline
Brush top always from front to rear.
앫
thinner
!
Wet cleaning:
앫
tar and stain removers
왘
앫
glass cleaner
앫
similar organic solvents
Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental
moldings may have chrome appearance, they could be made of anodized
aluminum that will be damaged when
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead,
use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
Brush the top with a soft-bristled
brush.
Wash with clear water or with a mild
detergent and an ample supply of lukewarm water by wiping with a soft-bristled brush or sponge from front to
rear.Then rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
Wash the top only when heavily soiled.
If only parts of the top have been washed,
wet the entire top and allow it to air-dry before lowering it into the storage compartment.
i
In general, regular spraying or cleaning
with clear water is sufficient to keep
the soft top clean.
368
They will cause damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated,
use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt
whether an ornamental molding is
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Vehicle care
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
왘
Cleaning the Parktronic system*
(Canada only) sensors
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.
Never apply strong force and only use a
soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe
dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage
the lens surface.
Do not apply strong pressure to the
sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.
!
Only use window cleaning solutions
that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which
are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps.
Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.
!
!
1 Parktronic system* sensors in front
bumper
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water and a soft,
non-scratching cloth to clean
sensors 1 on the bumpers.
To prevent scratches, never apply
strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the
sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty
sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
369
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle's on-board electronics have status
0) before cleaning the windshield and/or
the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.
왘
Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snapes into place.
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
370
!
Light alloy wheels
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch or
pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
!
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.
!
To clean the window interior, do not
use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or
cleaners containing solvents. Do not
touch the inside of the front, rear or
side windows with hard objects such as
an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
!
The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately
after it has been cleaned, especially not
after the wheel rims have been cleaned
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim
cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it
is parked after cleaning. To do so,
please drive your vehicle for several
minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
Operation
Vehicle care
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz
approved Wheel Care products, take
care not to spray them on the brake
disks.
Hard plastic trim items
Headliner and shelf below rear window
왘
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
!
Plastic and rubber parts
왘
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
!
To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents.
왘
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz
approved Leather Care.
Instrument cluster and cup holders
Carpets
왘
왘
왘
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution.
Seat belts
왘
Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
!
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
and Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry
the webbing at temperatures above
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
!
To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents.
371
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Nubuck leather upholstery (only for
CLK 55 AMG)
왘
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
372
왘
The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
with a protective coating.
Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
vehicle.
왘
!
왘
Leather upholstery
Wood trims
Wipe nubuck leather upholstery with
damp microfiber cloth to remove dust
and other light stains.
Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery with a dry microfiber cloth to remove oil stains.
!
Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care or any solvents to clean
nubuck leather upholstery.
Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leather upholstery.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
373
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If any of the following bulbs in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
-
The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are also
Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
switched off (see messages in display).
The brake system is still functioning normally 왘 Read and observe messages in the
but without the ABS available.
multifunction display (컄 page 383).
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
왘 Have the system checked at an authoother systems such as the navigation
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
system* or the automatic transmission may
as possible.
also be malfunctioning.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
왘
Switch off electrical consumers that
are currently not needed, e.g. seat
heating*.
왘
If necessary, have the generator (alternator) and battery checked.
The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
374
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
;
3
Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
(Canada only) comes on while driving and
you hear a warning sound.
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
You are driving with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake
brake set.
(컄 page 50).
There is insufficient brake fluid 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
in the reservoir.
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
375
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
ú
±
Possible cause/consequence
(USA only)
The yellow engine There is a malfunction in:
(Canada only) malfunction indi- 앫 The fuel management system
cator lamp comes
on while driving. 앫 The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which affect emissions
Suggested solution
왘
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may
switch the engine to its Limp-Home
Mode (emergency operation).
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is used by
the service station to link the vehicle to the
shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions
through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left area of the
footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
A loss of pressure has been
왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 318).
detected in the fuel system. The fuel If it is not closed properly:
cap may not be closed properly or
왘 Close the fuel cap.
the fuel system may be leaky.
If it is closed properly:
Your fuel tank is empty.
왘
Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
After refuelling, start turn off and restart the
engine three or four times in succession.
The Limp-Home mode is canceled. You do not
need to have your vehicle checked.
376
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
•
Possible cause/consequence
The red coolant warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
Suggested solution
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Add coolant to prevent engine from
overheating (컄 page 327).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
왘
Have the cooling system checked.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
diator fan may be broken.
257°F (125°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
•
The red coolant warning lamp
The coolant temperature has exceeded
comes on while driving and you 257°F (125°C).
hear a warning sound.
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
왘
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
왘
Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
377
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
v
v
Possible cause/consequence
®
The yellow ESP warning lamp
comes on while driving.
The yellow ESP® warning lamp
flashes while driving.
®
The ESP is deactivated.
Suggested solution
왘
Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 91).
If the ESP® cannot be switched back on,
have
the system checked at an authoAdapt your speed and driving to the prevailrized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
ing road conditions.
possible.
Risk of accident!
The ESP® or traction control has come into 왘 When driving off, apply as little throtoperation because of detected traction loss
tle as possible.
in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 90).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.
378
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 318).
왘
Release the roll bars manually.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
A
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
C
The yellow roll bar warning lamp The roll bar system is malfunctioning.
comes on or flickers when the
engine is running.
<
The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on after starting the engine with passengers to fasten your seat belts before
all doors closed.
driving off.
<
The red seat belt telltale flashes
and you additionally hear an intermittent warning signal with increasing intensity for a maximum
of 60 seconds when the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h).
You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
place.
front passenger seat as being occupied.
379
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
1
Possible cause/consequence
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be deployed when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
380
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys왘 Drive with added caution to the
tems. The air bags or emergency tensioning
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
Center.
fail to deploy in an accident.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamp in center console
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
56 The front passenger front air bag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual
on the front passenger seat.
Warning!
Suggested solution
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 389).
G
If the 56 indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the weight of a
typical adult or someone larger than a small
individual on the front passenger seat, do
not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
381
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
56 The front passenger front air bag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain
illuminated with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less
on the front passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the
382
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Suggested solution
왘
Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.
왘
Make sure that no objects applying
supplemental weight onto the seat
are present.
왘
If the front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp remains out, have the
system checked as soon as possible
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 389).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages
appear in the multifunction display located
in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 146) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 136) or
button k, j, è, or ÿ on the
steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and
messages of less immediate priority can
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 136) or
button k, j, è, or ÿ on the
steering wheel. They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(컄 page 146). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain
important information which should be
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
383
Practical hints
What to do if …?
i
Switching on the ignition causes all
instrument cluster lamps (except low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) as well as the multifunction
display to come on. Make sure the
lamps and the multifunction display are
in working order before starting your
journey.
384
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may
appear in the display.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 385)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 395)
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Text messages
Display message
ABS
Possible cause/consequence
malfunction
Visit workshop
Possible solution
The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
has switched off. The ESP® and the BAS
Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
are also deactivated.
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an authomally but without the ABS available.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
385
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
ABS
Anti-lock
braking system
inoperative
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
왘
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
mally but without the ABS available.
Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
386
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
ESP
The ESP was deactivated because of a
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
malfunction or interrupted power supply. The
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
BAS and the Run Flat Indicator* are also deacCenter as soon as possible.
tivated.
Failure to follow these instructions
The ABS might not be operational.
increases the risk of an accident.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the systems specified above.
unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
Possible solution
®
If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v flashes As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
while driving and this message appears, the electronic traction system switches on
electronic traction system has switched off to again.
prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.
The self-diagnosis has not been completed
yet.
The display will clear after driving a short
distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The ESP®, BAS and the Run Flat Indicator* are
temporarily deactivated.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the systems specified above.
387
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ESP
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The battery might not be charged
sufficiently.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
The ESP®, BAS and the Run Flat Indicator* are
When the voltage is above this value again,
deactivated.
the ESP® is operational again.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the systems specified above.
malfunction
Visit workshop
The ESP® is deactivated because of a
malfunction.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
The ESP®, BAS and the Run Flat Indicator* are
deactivated.
Failure to follow these instructions
The brake system is still functioning normally increases the risk of an accident.
but without the systems specified above.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The ESP® or the ESP® display is
malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
388
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Front passenger
air bag
activated
see Oper.’s Man.
Front passenger front air bag is
activated while driving even though
a child, small individual, or object
below the system’s weight
threshold is on the front passenger
seat, or the front passenger seat is
empty. Objects on the seat or
forces acting on the seat may
make the system sense supplemental weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
passenger seat for the following:
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 34).
왘
Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.
왘
Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
are present. The system may recognize such supplemental weight and
sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater
weight than actually present.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch
on the ignition (컄 page 34).
(Continued on next page)
389
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
Monitor the 56 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 27) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following:
Front passenger
air bag
activated
see Oper.’s Man.
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the 56 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain
illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 78) has deactivated the air bag.
앫
the message Front passenger air bag activated see Oper.’s Man. or the message Front passenger air bag deactivated see Oper.’s Man. should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make
sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 78), the
56 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp remains
390
out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years
old and under and other small individuals
use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Front passenger
air bag
deactivated
see Oper.’s Man.
Front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces acting on the
seat may make the system sense a
decrease in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the
front passenger seat for the following:
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 34).
왘
Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
switch on the ignition (컄 page 34).
(Continued on next page)
391
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
Monitor the 56 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 27) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following:
Front passenger
air bag
deactivated
see Oper.’s Man.
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the 56 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain
illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 78) has deactivated the air bag.
앫
the message Front passenger air bag activated see Oper.’s Man. or the
message Front passenger air bag deactivated see Oper.’s Man. should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make
sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 78), the
56 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp remains
392
illuminated with an adult occupant on the
front passenger seat even after performing
the above corrective steps, do not have any
passenger use the front passenger seat until
the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
P
Possible cause/consequence
Selector lever
in park position
Possible solution
You have turned off the engine with the 왘 Place the gear selector lever in
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in gear
position P.
selector lever position N and opened the
driver’s door.
or
You have attempted to switch off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.
Please
shift to
N or P
You have attempted to start the engine 왘 Place the gear selector lever in
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
position P or N.
while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.
393
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
Run Flat Indicator
inactive
Run Flat Indicator* is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Check tires
Then reactivate
Run Flat Indicator
There was a warning message about a 왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is
loss in the tire inflation pressure and
set for each tire.
the Run Flat Indicator* has not been
왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator*.
reactivated yet.
Run Flat Indicator
unavailable
The Run Flat Indicator* has been
switched off due to an error.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
394
Possible solution
왘
Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Symbol messages
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
#
Visit workshop
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
왘
앫
broken poly-V-belt
앫
alternator malfunctioning
Stop immediately in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so and check
the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Low voltage
Charge battery
The battery has insufficient voltage.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 48).
Low voltage
Switch off
consumers
The battery has insufficient voltage.
왘
Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers.
395
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
2
Brake wear
Visit workshop
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
왘
Release parking
brake
You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake
(컄 page 50).
Brake fluid
Visit workshop
There is insufficient brake fluid in the res- 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a
ervoir.
safe location as soon as possible and
notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
;
!
3
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Warning!
G
Driving with the message “Brake fluid
Visit workshop” displayed can result in
an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
396
Have the brake pads replaced as soon
as possible.
!
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ú
Visit workshop
There may be a malfunction in the
왘
Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 327).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
B
Warning!
앫
fuel injection system
앫
ignition system
앫
exhaust system
앫
fuel system
The coolant level is too low.
Coolant
Check level
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.
397
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
•
Coolant
Stop, engine off
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so and turn
off the engine.
왘
Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
398
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
•
Coolant
Stop, engine off
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off
the engine.
왘
Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water
pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
Coolant
Visit workshop
왘
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in
serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The cooling fan for the coolant is mal- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature display.
functioning.
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
399
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
4
Check gas cap
See Oper.’s Man.
A loss of pressure has been detected in 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 318).
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
왘 Close the fuel cap.
leaky.
If it is closed properly:
왘
G
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The instrument cluster display is malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
tioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
The displays for several systems have
malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned.
±
J
400
Display defective
Visit workshop
Doors open
Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
relay information to the control system.
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz CenThe following systems may have failed:
ter.
앫
Coolant temperature display
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.
왘
Close the doors.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
:
USA only:
The engine oil level is too low.
왘
Add 1 qt. engine oil
at next refueling
Add engine oil (컄 page 325) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 323).
Canada only:
Add 1 liter engine oil
at next refueling
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
You have added too much engine oil.
왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. ObThere is a risk of damaging the engine or
serve all legal requirements with rethe catalytic converter.
spect to its disposal.
Engine oil level
Stop, engine off
There is no oil in the engine. There is a
danger of engine damage.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as possible.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Add engine oil (컄 page 325) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 323).
401
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
:
Engine oil level
Visit workshop
The engine oil has dropped to a critical
level.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 323) and add oil as required
(컄 page 325).
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil
at next refueling (Canada: 1 liter) appears while the engine is running and at
operating temperature, the engine oil level
has dropped to approximately the
minimum level.
402
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be
topped to the required level with an
approved oil specified in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in
serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
A
Reserve fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 318).
Y
I
Hood open
You are driving with the hood open.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 322).
Remove key
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Replace key
No additional code available for SmartKey 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
Center as soon as possible.
Key
Check battery
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter- 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 435).
ies are discharged.
Key
not recognized
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
recognized while the engine is running bedo so.
cause
왘 Search for the SmartKey.
앫 the SmartKey is not in the vehicle
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
앫 there is strong radio-frequency inter- locked nor can the engine be started
again after the engine has been stopped.
ference
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey
mentarily not recognized.
in the vehicle.
왘
Keyless Go
Check system
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey
in the starter switch if necessary.
The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing.
Center as soon as possible.
403
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
I
Key recognized
in vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
Key
do not forget key
This display appears (for a maximum of 왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
왘 Take the SmartKey with
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
in the starter switch.
the vehicle.
Message is only a reminder.
Active Light System
currently
unavailable
The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Active Light System
malfunction
Drive to workshop
The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Active Light System
Substitute bulb on
The active headlamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Another light is being used.
Center as soon as possible.
3rd brake lamp
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tioning.
Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp
Drive to workshop
Stop lamp illumination is delayed or lamp 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
is permanently on.
Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp, left
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning.
.
404
Possible solution
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Brake lamp, right
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The display for the lamps or the system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning.
Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp, left
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Front foglamp, right
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
High beam, left
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
High beam, right
The right high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
Lamp sensor
Drive to workshop
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual (컄 page 156).
왘
Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
License plate lamp,
left
The left license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
License plate lamp,
right
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
405
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Low beam, left
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘
Low beam, right
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
406
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Parking lamp
front left
The left front parking lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Parking lamp
front right
The right front parking lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Rear foglamp
back-up lamp on
The foglamp is malfunctioning. A back-up 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
bulb is being used.
Center as soon as possible.
Reverse lamp, left
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.
Reverse lamp, right
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Side marker lamp
front left
The front left side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tioning.
Center as soon as possible.
Side marker lamp
front right
The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Tail lamp left
back-up lamp on
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Tail lamp right
back-up lamp on
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Turn off lamps
Lamps have been turned on although the 왘 Turn off the headlamps.
SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 0.
Turn signal,
front left
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Turn signal,
front right
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Turn signal,
left mirror
The left turn signal in the side mirror is
왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
malfunctioning. This message will only appossible.
pear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
407
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
.
Turn signal,
right mirror
The right turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
malfunctioning. This message will only appossible.
pear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn signal rear left
back-up lamp on
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
Turn signal rear right
back-up lamp on
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
Please engage
roll-over bar
The roll bar is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Please release
roll-over bar
The roll bar is malfunctioning.
왘
Operate the roll bars manually
(컄 page 423).
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
408
Possible solution
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
(
Lock driver’s
seat
The driver seat backrest is not engaged.
Fold back and push the seat backrest until the seat cushion and seat backrest audibly engage into the driving position.
Lock front
passenger seat
The passenger seat backrest is not engaged.
Fold back and push the seat backrest until the seat cushion and seat backrest audibly engage into the driving position.
<
Seat belt system
Drive to workshop
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
L
Tele Aid malfunction
Drive to workshop
One or more main functions of the Tele
Aid system are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1
Restraint system
defective
Drive to workshop
The system is malfunctioning.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the SRS may not be deploy when needed in an accident, which
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
409
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
K
Lock top
The soft top is not properly locked.
왘
Lock the soft top again (컄 page 259).
Top being opened
The soft top is not completely open or
closed. The hydraulics are losing pressure.
왘
Open or close the soft top all the way.
Top
Visit workshop
The soft top is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Start engine to
operate top
The on-board voltage is too low.
왘
Start the engine.
Top locked
as vehicle is moving
You have attempted to open or close the 왘 Pull over to the side of the road and resoft top while driving.
peat soft top operation while the vehicle is stationary.
Steering oil
Visit workshop
The steering gear oil level is too low. There 왘 Have the system checked by an authois a danger of steering gear damage.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
_
Warning!
G
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
410
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
t
X
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Function
Unavailable
This display appears if button t or
s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Tire pressure
Check tires
The Run Flat Indicator* indicates that the 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
pressure is too low in one or more tires.
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required (컄 page 341).
왘
If necessary, change the wheel
(컄 page 446).
왘
Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator* after adjusting the tire inflation pressure
values (컄 page 343).
411
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Ê
Trunk open
This message will appear whenever the
trunk is open.
왘
Close the trunk.
Close trunk lid
This message will appear when the soft
top is operated with the trunk open.
왘
Close the trunk.
Trunk partitioner
Please close
This message will appear when the soft
top is operated with the luggage cover
open.
왘
Fold down and latch luggage cover
(컄 page 262).
Washer fluid
Check level
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 329).
total reservoir capacity.
W
412
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
왔 Where will I find...?
First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit
The first aid kit is located in the trunk on
the right side secured by a hook and loop
fastener.
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
1 First aid kit
2 Hook and loop fastener
왘
Loosen hook and loop fastener 2.
왘
Remove first aid kit 1.
i
The following is included:
앫
Towing eye bolt
앫
Wheel wrench
앫
Alignment bolt
앫
Vehicle jack
앫
Collapsible wheel chock
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Fuse extractor
앫
Straps for soft top emergency operation
앫
A pair of gloves
i
Hex wrench:
You will find the hex wrench for
manually operating the roll bars
(컄 page 423) or the soft top
(컄 page 425) at the lower edge of the
storage well casing.
The spare wheel bolts are fixed at the
Minispare wheel.
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
413
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Removing the vehicle tool kit
i
왘
Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage
well casing 5 must point in the direction of travel. Otherwise you cannot
place the storage well casing 2 on top
and secure the Minispare wheel with
retaining screw 1.
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
왘
3 Arrow
4 Minispare wheel
5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
6 Vehicle tool kit
1 Retaining screw
2 Storage well casing
왘
Remove vehicle tool kit 6.
Storing the vehicle tool kit
왘
Loosen retaining screw 1 in the middle of storage well casing 2 by turning
it counterclockwise.
왘
Place vehicle tool kit 6 in vehicle tool
kit storage well casing 5.
왘
Remove storage well casing 2.
왘
Place storage well casing 2 over the
vehicle tool kit storage well casing 5
and turn retaining screw 1 clockwise
as far it will go to secure the Minispare
wheel.
414
Disengage trunk floor handle in upper
edge of trunk and lower trunk floor cover.
!
To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from upper edge of
trunk and lower trunk floor before
closing the trunk.
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Vehicle jack
Warning!
The vehicle jack is located in the storage
compartment underneath the trunk floor.
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
Operational position
왘
Storage position
왘
Remove vehicle jack from its
compartment.
왘
Turn crank handle in direction of arrow
as far as it will go.
Turn crank handle clockwise.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment:
앫
It should be fully collapsed
앫
The handle must be folded in (storage
position)
415
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
왘
Tilt both plates upward 1.
The collapsible wheel chock serves to
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.
왘
Fold the lower plate outward 2.
왘
Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
Minispare wheel
The Minispare wheel is located in the
storage compartment underneath the
trunk floor.
Removing the Minispare wheel
1 Tilt the plate upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
416
왘
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
왘
Loosen the retaining screw in the middle of storage well casing by turning it
counterclockwise (컄 page 414).
왘
Remove the storage well casing
(컄 page 414).
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Storing the Minispare wheel
왘
Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel
well.
왘
Place vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.
Make sure arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit
storage well casing 4 points in the
direction of travel.
1 Vehicle tool kit
Wheel wrench
Jack
2 Arrow
3 Minispare wheel, Wheel bolts for
Minispare wheel
4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
왘
왘
Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4.
Remove Minispare wheel 3.
왘
Place storage well casing (컄 page 414)
over the vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4 and turn the retaining screw
(컄 page 414) clockwise as far it will go
to secure the Minispare wheel.
i
Arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage
well casing 4 must point in the
direction of travel. Otherwise you
cannot place the storage well casing
(컄 page 414) on top and secure the
Minispare wheel with the retaining
screw (컄 page 414).
왘
Disengage trunk floor handle in upper
edge of trunk and lower trunk floor cover.
!
To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from upper edge of
trunk and lower trunk floor before
closing the trunk.
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
The Minispare wheel should only be used
temporarily, and should be replaced with a
regular road wheel as quickly as possible.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.
417
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily
use the Minispare wheel when observing
the following restrictions:
앫
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or
replaced as appropriate.
앫
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one Minispare wheel mounted.
Spare wheel bolts
The spare wheel bolts are fixed at the
Minispare wheel.
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel, or other
steel rims. The use of any wheel bolts
other than wheel bolts 2 for the
Minispare wheel will physically damage
the vehicle’s brakes.
Warning!
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 471).
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel
(located in trunk with spare wheel)
418
!
G
Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
driver’s door and the trunk using the
mechanical key.
i
Unlocking and opening the driver’s
door and/or the trunk with the
mechanical key will trigger the
anti-theft alarm system.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
1 Unlocking
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
왘
Move locking tab 1 in direction of
arrow.
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
왘
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
왘
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Pull the outside door handle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 35).
419
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
왘
A minimum height clearance of 5.41 ft
(1.65 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock until it stops.
왘
Turn the mechanical key
counterclockwise to position 1 and
hold it in this position.
왘
Pull the trunk lid handle 2 and lift the
trunk lid.
The trunk lid lock is located next to the
handle above the rear license plate recess.
The trunk opens.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance.
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle
왘
Turn the mechanical key back and
remove it from the trunk lid lock.
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, do the following:
왘
Close the passenger door and the
trunk.
왘
Press the central locking switch in the
center console (컄 page 118).
왘
Check to see whether the locking knob
on the passenger door has moved
down.
왘
If necessary, push it down manually.
왘
Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 419).
왘
Check whether the trunk is locked.
왘
If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (컄 page 116).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
should now be locked.
420
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Fuel filler flap
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.
Warning!
1 Locking
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 1.
G
If you operate the emergency release button, be careful of the sharp edges so that
you do not injure yourself.
The release button is on the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment behind
the side trim.
왘
Open trunk lid.
왘
Remove the side trim from the
right-hand side of the luggage compartment.
왘
Reach inside through opening 2 in direction of arrow.
왘
Turn release knob 1 clockwise (arrow)
as far as will go.
The driver’s door is locked.
The fuel filler flap is released and can
be opened from outside.
왘
Open the fuel filler flap from outside.
421
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Center armrest design B
Manually unlocking the gear selector
lever
In case of power failure, the gear selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow
the vehicle.
i
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
왘
Center armrest design A
왘
Open the storage compartment under
the center armrest (컄 page 281).
왘
왘
왘
Take out storage box 1.
422
Insert a tool 2 (e.g. flat blade screwdriver) into the opening.
왘
Pull the tab 1 of the covering back in
direction of the center armrest compartment.
왘
Insert a tool 2 (e.g. flat blade screwdriver) into the opening.
왘
Perform the following two steps simultaneously:
Perform the following two steps simultaneously:
왘
Press tool 2 forward in the
direction of the arrow.
왘
Move selector lever from
position P.
Reinstall the storage box 1 after removing the tool 2 from the opening.
왘
Push tool 2 down- and forward in
the direction of the arrow.
왘
Move gear selector lever from
position P.
왘
Remove the tool 2 from the opening.
왘
Push the tab 1 of the covering back.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
왘
Operating roll bars manually
i
Releasing roll bars manually
With the roll bars released, the soft top
cannot be operated using the soft top
switch and the rear head restraints
cannot be lowered using the rear head
restraint lowering switch.
If the roll bar system is malfunctioning, you
can release the roll bars manually.
Warning!
Close the soft top (컄 page 257).
G
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in
the clock does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then
the roll bar system is not operating properly
and may not activate in an accident. In this
case, raise the roll bars manually before
continuing to drive.
For safety reasons drive only with the roll
bars raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Open the trunk (컄 page 108).
왘
Fold back the luggage cover
(컄 page 262).
왘
Take hex wrench out of its storage
location in the storage well casing
(컄 page 413).
1 Perforation
왘
Push hex wrench through
perforation 1 in trim of rear wall in
trunk.
Warning!
G
Make sure no one is located in the roll bar’s
path of motion while the next steps are being carried out.
When the roll bar is manually released, the
rear head restraints and the roll bar underneath shoot up almost instantaneously.
423
컄컄
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
컄컄
Lowering roll bars manually
With the soft top open, you can lower the
roll bars manually after they have been released.
i
2 Hex wrench
왘
Insert long side of hex wrench 2 into
opening.
왘
Using hex wrench 2, press release
catch down in direction of arrow.
The roll bar extends with a loud sound.
왘
Repeat this step for the second roll bar.
Have the systems checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
424
With the roll bars released, the soft top
cannot be operated using the soft top
switch and the rear head restraints
cannot be lowered using the rear head
restraint lowering switch.
Warning!
G
Never lower the roll bars manually unless
the soft top is open. Otherwise, the roll bars
function could be impaired, no longer reducing your risk of injury in an optimal manner.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll bar lowered when the
soft top is closed.
1 Orientation seam
2 Hex wrench
3 Press wrench down
4 Press head restraint down
왘
Take hex wrench out of its storage
location in the storage well casing
(컄 page 413).
왘
Align hex wrench so that its long side is
parallel to orientation seam 1 and insert hex wrench 2 into gap on left side
of respective head restraint.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왘
Press hex wrench down firmly in direction of arrow 3 and hold.
왘
Press head restraint down in direction
of arrow 4.
왘
Pull hex wrench 2 out and take weight
off head restraint.
왘
Repeat this procedure on roll bar for
second head restraint.
!
Soft top emergency operation
Manually closing the soft top is a complicated and technically demanding
procedure. Close the soft top manually
in emergency cases only. Otherwise,
visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Please read the instructions
fully before beginning operation and
only undertake it with another person
and if you feel fully capable of performing the tasks involved.
If the soft top cannot be automatically
closed, check the following:
앫
Is the luggage cover engaged in place
(컄 page 262)?
앫
Have the roll bars been released? If so,
lower the roll bars manually
(컄 page 424).
앫
Is the trunk lid closed (컄 page 110)?
앫
Is there sufficient on-board voltage?
Start the engine if necessary.
These messages will also appear in the
multifunction display (컄 page 410).
If automatic operation still does not function properly, you can close the soft top
manually.
Warning!
G
앫
It is important that a second person
helps you. Otherwise, you could become
trapped or injured.
앫
Remove any wristwatches or jewelry
such as rings or bracelets. Otherwise,
they could get caught in the vehicle
mechanism, causing personal injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle.
앫
Always use the grips provided as indicated. Otherwise you could injure yourself.
This procedure should be performed with
great care by two persons.
425
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왘
Engage parking brake.
왘
Lower the side windows.
왘
Lower rear head restraints
(컄 page 120).
i
If the rear head restraints cannot be
lowered using the rear head restraint
lowering switch, the roll bars may have
been released. For more information,
see “Operating roll bars manually”
(컄 page 423).
426
왘
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey
from starter switch.
왘
Open the trunk.
왘
Remove the trunk floor cover.
왘
Take the two straps for soft top emergency operation out of vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 413).
왘
Take hex wrench out of its storage
location in the storage well casing
(컄 page 413).
왘
Open the left side trim panel in the
trunk.
1 Locking mechanism
왘
Pull locking mechanism 1 out until it
stops and rotate it approx. one-quarter
of a turn.
왘
Make sure the locking mechanism
does not retract again. If this happens,
pull the locking mechanism out again
and rotate it approx. one-quarter of a
turn.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
2 Trim
3 Locking mechanism
왘
왘
왘
Fold the right-hand side of the trunk
floor away.
Detach trim 2 along the perforation.
왘
Pull locking mechanism 3 out until it
stops and rotate it approx. one-quarter
of a turn.
Make sure the locking mechanism
does not retract again. If this happens,
pull the locking mechanism out again
and rotate it approx. one-quarter of a
turn.
4 Hex wrench
5 Screw of hydraulic pump
왘
Insert hex wrench 4 into screw 5.
왘
Turn hydraulic pump screw 5 counterclockwise one revolution with hex
wrench 4.
!
Do not operate the soft top switch with
screw 5 in the opened position, otherwise the hydraulic pump could be damaged.
컄컄
427
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
컄컄
6 Lever
7 Soft top storage compartment hinge
The soft top storage compartment hinges
are located on the left and right of the
space between the soft top compartment
cover and the trunk seal.
왘
Pull the two levers 6 apart and fold
levers 6 of soft top storage compartment hinge 7 forward on both sides
over the detent position.
428
8 Strap
왘
Pull strap 8, supplied in vehicle tool
kit, behind soft top storage compartment through hinge 7.
왘
Bring strap together in front of hinge.
왘
Pull the side with the handle through
the loop on the opposite side.
왘
Pull strap between soft top storage
compartment hinge and soft top compartment.
왘
Secure second strap to second hinge in
the same manner.
!
Do not pull the straps when the trunk is
open.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized in the area of the rear shelf or inside the trunk.
왘
Place both straps on soft top compartment cover.
왘
Take hex wrench out of trunk.
왘
Close trunk lid.
You will only have access to the trunk
again when the emergency operation
has been completed.
왘
You and your assistant should each
take one of the straps by the handle.
왘
With a strong, simultaneous tug on the
loops, pull soft top compartment cover
upward and out to the rear.
컄컄
!
The trunk lid must remain closed during
the next steps in the procedure. Otherwise the trunk lid and the soft top compartment cover may come into contact
with one another and be damaged.
Warning!
G
At this point, the remaining procedure
needs to be done by two people. Otherwise
you could be injured.
429
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
컄컄
Warning!
G
In the next step, you and your assistant
should each take hold of the soft top compartment cover as shown in the illustration.
Both of you should use your free hand to
support yourselves on the edge of the trunk
lid as shown in the illustration.
9 Soft top compartment cover
왘
One person should stand on the left
side of the vehicle and the other on the
right side.
If either you or your helper assume a different position, one or both of you could be
trapped or injured.
왘
Pulling the cover back in one smooth
motion, lift soft top compartment
cover 9 into a vertical position until it
stops.
!
Make sure the soft top storage compartment hinges do not fold down during this procedure. Otherwise your
vehicle could be damaged.
430
a Edge of soft top
왘
From left and right sides, reach into
soft top compartment underneath
edge of soft top a.
Warning!
G
Do not place your hands near the upper
windshield area, trunk lid, or between soft
top roof panels and hinges while the soft top
is being raised and locked. Serious personal
injury may occur.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왘
Turn the soft top locking mechanism
screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow d as far as it
will go.
The clasp will close and the soft top is
now locked onto the windshield frame.
!
b Windshield frame
왘
Lift soft top out of soft top compartment and pull it forward to windshield
frame b.
c Opening
d Locking
왘
Take off protective cap on the inner
side of the soft top.
왘
Insert hex wrench into soft top locking
mechanism screw.
왘
Turn the soft top locking mechanism
screw with hex wrench clockwise in direction of arrow c as far as it will go.
Make sure you turn the hex wrench
counterclockwise as far as it will go.
Otherwise the soft top may not lock
properly.
The clasp will open and the soft top will
engage audibly.
431
컄컄
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
컄컄
e Material tensioning frame
f Soft top compartment cover
왘
Lift material tensioning frame e into a
vertical position.
왘
Lower soft top compartment cover f.
!
Make sure the soft top compartment
cover f does not collide or make contact with the material tensioning
frame e.
432
g Soft top base
왘
With the palm of your hand, press the
window in material tensioning
frame e until it is positioned on the
soft top compartment cover f.
왘
You and your assistant should press
soft top compartment cover f forward and down with the palms of your
hands until it snaps into place in the
guide. Place your hands on the areas
indicated by the arrows.
At the same time, gently press material
tensioning frame e down with the
palms of your hands.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Warning!
!
G
Make sure you turn the hex wrench
counterclockwise as far as it will go.
Otherwise the soft top may not lock
properly.
Position hands as indicated by arrows so
that when you press soft top compartment
cover f forward and lower material tensioning frame e, your hands cannot become trapped.
왘
Have the soft top operation checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
h Locking
!
왘
Insert hex wrench into soft top locking
mechanism screw.
왘
Turn the soft top locking mechanism
screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow h as far as it
will go.
If, after completing the soft top emergency operation, the trunk cannot be
opened using the remote trunk lid release switch in the driver’s door,
the Š button on the SmartKey, or
the trunk lid release handle in the license plate recess, press the soft top
compartment cover down again as described above.
The soft top is locked onto the windshield frame.
Do not open the trunk with the emergency key, as this could otherwise
damage the trunk lid and the soft top
compartment cover.
433
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraints have been triggered in a rear-end collision, the active
head restraints must be reset. Otherwise,
the active head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another rear-end collision.
i
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You will find the reset tool for manually
operating the active head restraints in
the Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
Press the reset tool 3 downward until
you hear the active head restraint release mechanism audibly engage.
왘
Pull out reset tool 3.
왘
Firmly press the head restraint
cushion 1 back toward the rear head
restraint cover 2 until it engages.
Warning!
1 Head restraint cushion
2 Head restraint cover
3 Reset tool
4 Hole
왘
Take the reset tool 3 out of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
왘
Guide reset tool 3 into the hole 4 between the rear head restraint cover 2
and the head restraint cushion 1.
!
Be careful not to damage upholstery.
434
왘
G
When pushing back the head restraint cushion, take care that your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
왘
Repeat this procedure on the active
head restraint for the second seat.
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 73).
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 37).
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
i
When changing batteries, always
replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
When inserting the batteries, make
sure they are clean and free of lint.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
435
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
SmartKey
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Remove the mechanical key
(컄 page 419).
1 Mechanical key
2 Slide
3 Battery compartment
왘
Insert the mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow in side opening.
436
왘
Using mechanical key 1, push gray
slide 2 to unlatch battery
compartment 3.
왘
Pull battery compartment 3 out of the
housing in the direction of arrow.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
왘
Remove the batteries 4 in direction of
arrow.
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 4 under the contact
spring 5 with the positive terminal (+)
side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment 3 into
housing until it locks into place.
왘
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 1 under the contact spring
with the positive terminal (+) side
facing up.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Remove the mechanical key
(컄 page 419).
왘
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
왘
Insert the mechanical key in side opening and push grey slide (컄 page 436).
왘
Slide mechanical key 3 back into the
SmartKey.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey
and the KEYLESS-GO*.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘
Pull the battery compartment out of the
housing (컄 page 436).
1 Battery
2 Tilt battery up
3 Mechanical key
왘
Using mechanical key 3, apply
pressure to position 2.
Battery 1 tilts up slightly.
왘
Pull batteries 1 out in direction of
arrow.
437
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp
assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
LED
2 Turn signal lamp
1156 NA
3 Halogen headlamp:
Low beam
H7 (55 W)
D2S-35 W
4 Halogen headlamp:
High beam/high beam H7 (55 W)
flasher
If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of
high humidity, driving the vehicle a
distance with the lights on should clear
up the fogging.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
High beam flasher
Parking and standing
lamp
i
438
1 Additional turn signal
lamp
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Low and high beam1
i
Back-up bulbs will be brought into use
when lamps malfunction. Observe the
messages in the multifunction display
(컄 page 404).
Type
1
H7 (55 W)
W5W
5 Front fog lamp
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp*
HB4 (51 W)
6 Side marker lamp
W5W
H7 (55 W)
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps* do not replace
the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Warning!
Lamp
G
Type
7 High mounted brake
lamp
LED
8 Brake lamp
P 21 W
9 Turn signal lamp
P 21 W
a Tail, parking and stand- P 21/4 W
ing lamp, side marker W 5 W
b Backup lamp
P 21 W
c License plate lamps
C5W
d Rear fog lamp, driver’s P 21/4 W
side
Notes on bulb replacement
앫
Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
i
Have the headlamp adjustment
checked regularly.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors
앫
High mounted brake lamp
앫
Bi-Xenon* lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
앫
Front side marker lamps
439
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 127).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 321).
Front lamps halogen-type
왘
Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 4
and is level to it.
왘
Reinsert bulb holder 4 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
왘
Align housing cover 1 and turn it
clockwise.
High beam bulb
3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
4 Bulb holder of low beam bulb
5 Bulb holder of high beam bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb holder 5 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 5.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 5
and is level to it.
Low beam bulb
1 Housing cover for low beam headlamp
2 Housing cover for high beam headlamp, parking and standing lamp
440
왘
Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 4.
Reinsert bulb holder 5 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
왘
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
왘
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘
Turn bulb socket 3 counterclockwise
and remove it.
왘
Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 3.
왘
Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Place bulb socket 3 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
Front lamps Bi-Xenon*-type
Warning!
G
Do not remove the cover 3 for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in
xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.
4 Bulb holder for high beam flasher bulb
5 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
왘
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 6.
왘
Press the new bulb into bulb socket 6.
왘
Press bulb socket 6 back into the
lamp.
왘
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Housing cover for high beam flasher,
parking and standing lamp
3 Housing cover for Bi-Xenon* headlamp
441
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam bulb for high beam flasher
Front turn signal lamp bulb
Additional turn signal lamps
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.
The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
왘
Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
왘
Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 4.
Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 1.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 4
and is level to it.
Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 1 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to function, the entire turn signal unit must be replaced. Have the additional turn signal unit
replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘
Place bulb socket 1 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
왘
왘
Reinsert bulb holder 4 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
왘
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
442
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull out bulb socket 5 with the bulb.
왘
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 5.
왘
Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5.
왘
Press bulb socket 5 back into the
lamp.
왘
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
Front side marker lamp
Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs
is a technically highly demanding process,
we recommend you have the side marker
lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
왘
Pull tab 2 in the direction of the arrow.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following first:
왘
Remove the bulb carrier.
왘
Press gently onto the respective bulb
and turn counterclockwise out of its
bulb socket.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 127).
Tail lamp unit
왘
Open trunk lid.
왘
Swing the trim panel covering the corresponding rear lights to the side.
왘
Press the new bulb gently into its bulb
socket and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Reinstall the bulb carrier.
Let tab 2 engage.
왘
Connect the electrical connector 1
until it engage.
왘
Reinstall trim panel.
License plate lamp
1 Screws
1 Connector
2 Tab
왘
Disconnect electrical connector 1.
1 Brake lamp
2 Turn signal lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Standing and side marker lamp
5 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)/tail
왘
Loosen both screws 1.
왘
Remove the license plate lamp.
왘
Replace the tubular lamp.
왘
Reinstall the license plate lamp.
왘
Retighten the screws 1.
443
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing and installing wiper blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: make
sure the vehicle's on board electronics
have status 0).
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
444
Pull the tab 2 in the direction of
arrow 1.
The wiper blade is unlocked.
왘
Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need
to remove the wiper blade.
왘
Carefully fold the wiper arm back to
rest on the windshield.
Removing wiper blades
!
Hold on to the wiper arm when folding
the wiper arm back. If released, the
force of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arms are folded forward.
왘
1 Unlocking
2 Tab
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
왘
왘
Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need
to position the wiper blade under the
wiper arm and hold it.
Carefully fold the wiper arm back and
make sure that the taper piece 4
slides into the recess 1 at the wiper
blade.
!
1 Recess
2 Tab
3 Locking
4 Taper piece
5 Square recess
Make certain that the square recess 5
on the taper piece 4 is on the top, otherwise the taper piece 4 can not slide
in the recess 1 at the wiper blade. If
the square recess 5 is not at the top
turn the taper piece 4 around to bring
the square recess 5 to the top.
왘
!
Hold on to the wiper arm when folding
the wiper arm back. If released, the
force of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
Slide the tab 2 back in the direction of
arrow 3 until it audibly engages.
The wiper blade is locked.
445
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
Preparing the vehicle
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style
accordingly.
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers
(컄 page 133).
왘
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.
왘
Set the parking brake (컄 page 57).
i
왘
Move the gear selector lever to P.
Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one Minispare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.
446
왘
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the
gear selector lever once (컄 page 59).
왘
Open the driver’s door (this puts the ignition in position 0 (컄 page 36), same
as with the SmartKey removed from
the starter switch). The driver’s door
then can be closed again.
Vehicles with SmartKey:
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 58).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the Minispare wheel
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Preparing the vehicle
Prepare the vehicle as described on
(컄 page 446).
왘
왘
Take the wheel wrench and the jack
out of the trunk (컄 page 416).
Take the Minispare wheel and wheel
bolts out of the trunk (컄 page 416).
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizeable objects.
One wheel chock is included with the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 413).
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place the wheel chock in front of and
another sizeable object behind the
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill,
place the wheel chock and the other sizeable object as follows:
왘
Place the wheel chock and another
sizeable object on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the axle not
being worked on.
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
447
Practical hints
Flat tire
1 Wheel wrench
왘
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
448
2 Jack
3 Take-up bracket
왘
Place jack 2 on firm ground.
왘
Position jack 2 under take-up
bracket 3 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
왘
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while
vehicle is raised.
Warning!
G
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
앫
Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
앫
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
Mounting the spare wheel
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
remove.
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘
Remove the remaining bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel
(located in trunk with Minispare wheel)
!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the Minispare wheel, or other
steel rims. The use of any wheel bolts
other than wheel bolts 2 for the
Minispare wheel will physically damage
the vehicle’s brakes.
Remove the wheel.
449
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
왘
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
왘
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
G
Only use Genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
450
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
왘
왘
Warning!
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until the full weight of the
vehicle is resting on the ground.
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Remove the jack.
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
Before storing the jack, it should be fully
collapsed, with handle folded in (storage
position) (컄 page 415).
왘
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
following the diagonal sequence
illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are
tight. Observe a tightening torque
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Store the jack and the other vehicle
tools in the trunk.
451
Practical hints
Flat tire
MOExtended system*
Warning!
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*.
!
The maximum distance in emergency
mode depends on the vehicle’s load. It
is 30 miles (50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and 18 miles (30 km) if the
vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving distance begins in emergency
mode is when the warning message
appears in the multifunction display
indicating that there is a loss of tire
inflation pressure.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
452
G
In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such situations as:
Do not continue driving in emergency mode
if
앫
you notice knocking sounds
앫
the vehicle starts to shake
앫
smoke develops and you smell rubber
앫
driving around curves
앫
ESP® is intervening continuously
앫
while braking
앫
you notice tears on the tire sidewalls
앫
while accelerating rapidly
Therefore, your driving style must be adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and
driving maneuvers, as well as driving over
obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or off-road
areas). This is especially important if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can
be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is
driven cautiously, somewhat longer.
After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.
i
When replacing individual or all tires on
the vehicle, make sure only matching
tires marked with “MOExtended” are
mounted in the size specified for your
vehicle (컄 page 471).
Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
The battery is located in the engine
compartment on the right hand side.
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and
precautions when handling automotive
batteries (컄 page 328).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
1 Clamps
Removing filter box:
왘
Release clamps 1.
왘
Remove filter box.
Installing filter box:
왘
Insert filter box properly.
왘
Secure it with clamps 1.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
maintenance intervals or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
453
Practical hints
Battery
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect
Disconnecting the battery
Removing the battery
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 58).
왘
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Remove the screw securing the
battery.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
왘
Remove the battery support and
bracket.
왘
Pull out the ventilation tube from the
battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model, the ventilation tube is located either on the left or
right side of the battery).
왘
Take out the battery.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
2 Negative terminal
3 Positive terminal cover
454
왘
Press the start/stop button until
the engine shuts off.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 321).
왘
Remove the filter box (컄 page 453).
왘
Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 453).
왘
Disconnect the battery negative lead
from negative terminal 2.
왘
Remove cover 3 from the positive terminal.
왘
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Practical hints
Battery
Charging and reinstalling the battery
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit* specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability. Charge battery
in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger*.
왘
왘
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in
reverse order.
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
왘
Reinstall the filter box (컄 page 453).
i
The following procedures must be
carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting):
앫
Set the clock (컄 page 153).
Vehicles with COMAND*:
see COMAND operator’s manual.
앫
Synchronize the side windows
(컄 page 251).
Reconnecting the battery
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press the start/stop button until
the engine shuts off.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
왘
Connect the battery positive lead and
fasten its cover 3.
왘
Connect the battery negative lead 2.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
!
NEVER invert the terminal connections!
455
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
456
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Only use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when an engine is
started or running.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 328).
The battery is located on the right side of
the engine compartment. For jump starting, use the terminals in front of the battery.
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
1 Positive terminal of charged battery
2 Positive under hood terminal in front of
discharged battery
3 Negative under hood terminal in front
of discharged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
왘
Apply parking brake.
왘
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 321).
왘
Flip up cover from positive under hood
terminal 2 in front of the filter box
(컄 page 454).
Connect the positive terminal 1 of the
charged battery with the positive under
hood terminal 2 in front of the filter
box with the jumper cable. Clamp cable
to charged battery 1 first.
왘
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘
Connect the negative terminal 4 of
the charged battery with the negative
under hood terminal 3 in front of the
filter box with the jumper cable. Clamp
cable to charged battery 4 first.
왘
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘
Remove the jumper cables first from
the negative terminals 3 and 4 and
then from the positive terminals 2
and 1.
You can now turn on the lights.
왘
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
!
Never invert the terminal connections.
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
457
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 94) and the automatic central
locking (컄 page 159).
458
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1). Otherwise, the ESP® will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N and the SmartKey
must be in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the transmission, however,
we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange
for any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
G
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can
no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use,
switch on the ignition and activate the
combination switch for the left or right
turn signal in the usual manner – only
the selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel
as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 94).
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 159).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
459
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i
Installing towing eye bolt
If the battery is disconnected or
discharged
앫
the SmartKey will not turn in the
starter switch. For more information, see “Battery” (컄 page 453)
and “Jump starting” (컄 page 456).
앫
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P. For information on manually unlocking the
transmission gear selector lever,
see (컄 page 422).
Towing eye bolt CLK 350
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
To remove cover:
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
왘
Press mark on cover 1 or 2.
왘
Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor).
왘
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘
460
Fit cover 1 or 2 and snap into place.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing eye bolt CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG
Towing eye bolt in front bumper
The cover for the threaded bore in the front
bumper is identical to the cover on the
CLK 350.
To remove cover 1:
왘
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in
recess 2 on the edge of cover 1.
왘
Loosen cover 1 from the bumper using lever, to reveal the threaded hole
for towing eye bolt.
To remove and to reinstall cover, see “Towing eye bolt CLK 350” (컄 page 460).
To reinstall cover 1:
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the compartment
underneath the trunk floor).
Towing eye bolt in rear bumper
왘
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
왘
Hook right-hand side of the cover 1
into opening.
왘
Slide cover 1 as far as it will go in the
direction of the arrow 3.
왘
Gently press left-hand side of cover 1
in direction of the arrow 4.
The hooks on the left-hand side
engage.
1 Cover on right side of rear bumper
2 Recess in the cover
i
When closing the cover 1, make sure
the cover’s check strap does not get
caught.
461
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses are designed to protect the electrical circuits in your vehicle from a short circuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s)
and systems secured by that fuse will stop
operating.
The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses (컄 page 462):
앫
Fuse chart
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Fuse extractor
Warning!
Aids for replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuse chart
!
Keep the fuse boxes free by contamination and wetness. Otherwise, electrical
parts or systems could be damaged.
G
Only use fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question. Using other fuses may cause an
overload leading to a fire, and/or cause
damage to electrical components and/or
systems.
462
!
The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
앫
Main fuse box in passenger
compartment (컄 page 463)
앫
Fuse box in engine compartment
(컄 page 463)
앫
Fuse box in trunk (컄 page 464)
The fuse chart is located in the main fuse
box in the passenger compartment
(컄 page 463). The amperages of the fuses
are also given there.
Spare fuses
Spare fuses are located in the vehicle tool
kit in the spare wheel well (컄 page 413).
Fuse extractor
The fuse extractor is located in the trunk
underneath the trunk floor cover in the
storage well casing (컄 page 413).
Practical hints
Fuses
Mainfuse box in passenger
compartment
The main fuse box is located in the passenger compartment on the driver’s side of
the cockpit.
Opening fuse box
왘
Open the driver’s door.
왘
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into
the edge of the fuse box cover 1 at
the position indicated by the arrow.
왘
Loosen fuse box cover 1 from cockpit
using lever.
왘
Using your hands, remove fuse box
cover 1 rearward.
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the driver’s side.
Closing fuse box
1 Main fuse box cover
!
Do not use sharp objects such as a
screw driver to open the fuse box
cover 1 in the cockpit, as this could
damage it.
왘
Attach fuse box cover 1 in the front.
왘
Fold fuse box cover 1 in until it
engages.
1 Cover
2 Screw
3 Retainer
Removing cover
왘
Twist screws 2 90° counterclockwise.
왘
Lift the rear of cover 1.
왘
Slide out retainer 3 and remove
cover 1 by pulling towards front.
463
Practical hints
Fuses
Opening fuse box
Closing fuse box
왘
Make sure that the sealing rubber is
properly positioned.
왘
Press fuse box cover 4 down and
secure with clamps 5.
Fuse box in trunk
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind
the left-hand trim panel.
Installing cover
4 Fuse box cover
5 Clamps
왘
Insert cover 1 sideways into
retainer 3.
왘
Twist screws 2 90° clockwise.
왘
With a dry cloth, remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
1 Trim panel
왘
Release clamps 5.
Opening fuse box
왘
Remove fuse box cover 4.
왘
To open, pull trim panel 1 in the direction of the rear light and outward.
Closing fuse box
왘
464
Press trim panel 1 back into place.
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
465
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
466
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange
or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with
the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties, copies of which
are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
467
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label (includes
Paintwork code)
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
3 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission
standards
4 Vacuum line routing diagram label
5 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
6 Engine number (engraved on engine)
i
When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine
numbers.
468
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
CLK 350
CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Automatic belt tensioner
4 Power steering pump
5 Air conditioning compressor
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
469
Technical data
Engine
Model
CLK 350 (209.456)1
CLK 500 (209.475)1
CLK 55 AMG (209.476)1
Engine
272
113
113
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injec- 4-stroke engine, gasoline injec- 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
tion
tion
No. of cylinders
6
8
8
Bore
3.66 in (92.90 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.39 in (86.00 mm)
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3
3.62 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
213.5 cu in (3498 cm )
303.0 cu in (4966 cm )
331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio
10.5:1
10:1
11:1
302 hp/5600
(225 kW/5600 rpm)
362 hp/5750 rpm 2
(270 kW/5750 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm
1349
(350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm)
339 lb-ft/2700 - 4250 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 - 4250 rpm)
376 lb-ft/4000 rpm
(510 Nm/4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6300 rpm
6300 rpm
6700 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2404 mm
2380 mm
2380 mm
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
1
2
rpm 2
3
268 hp/6000
(200 kW/6000 rpm)
rpm 2
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
470
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
!
Only use tires which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving
safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed
for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the following on the
tire’s sidewall:
앫
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
equipment tires
AMG vehicles:
Does not apply to all approved tires
on AMG vehicles. For information
on tested and approved tires for
AMG vehicles, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Using tires other than those approved
by Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
For information on driving with
MOExtended tires, see
“MOExtended system*” (컄 page 345).
!
Using tires other than those approved
by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, such as
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
앫
increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load,
exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original
Extended (tires with limited run-flat
characteristics) original equipment
tires
471
Technical data
Rims and tires
i
i
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with
the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds
(컄 page 340) or for vehicle loads less
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 339). If such information
is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure
should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with
vehicle.
The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicles with winter
tires. Winter tires are not available as
standard or optional factory equipment, but can be purchased from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
472
Depending on vehicle model and the
standard or optional factory-equipped
wheel rim/tire configuration on your
vehicle (Appearance Package, Sport
Package etc.), equipping your vehicle
with winter tires approved for your
vehicle model may also require the
purchase of two or four wheel rims of
the recommended size for use with
these winter tires. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for more
information.
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
CLK 350
CLK 500
Rims (light alloy)
7.5 J x 17 H2
7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset
1.42 in (36 mm)
1.45 in (37 mm)
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.MOExtended
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.MOExtended
Winter
tires1,3
1,2,3
Winter tires
1
2
3
Radial-ply tires
Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator* only.
Not available as factory equipment.
473
Technical data
Rims and tires
CLK 55 AMG
CLK 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7.5 J x 17 H2
7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.45 in (37 mm)
1.45 in (37 mm)
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.
225/40 R18 92 H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
Winter tires
1
2
3
1,2,3
Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.
For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
474
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
CLK 350
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7.5 J x 17 H2
7.5 J x 17 H2
7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
Front axle:
1.42 in (36 mm)
1.46 in (37 mm)
1.46 in (37 mm)
1
225/45 R17 91W
225/45 R17 91W
225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
*1,2
225/45 R17 91W MOExtended
225/45 R17 91W MOExtended
-
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x17 H2
8.5 J x17 H2
8.5 J x18 H2
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
245/40 R17 91W
245/40 ZR17 91W
255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load)
245/40 R17 91W MOExtended
245/40 R17 91W MOExtended
-
Summer tires
Summer tires
Rear axle:
Summer
tires1,3
*1,2,3
Summer tires
1
2
3
Radial-ply tires
Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator* only.
Must not be used with snow chains.
475
Technical data
Rims and tires
Minispare wheel
All Models
Rim
3.5 B x 17 H2
Wheel offset
0.67 in (17 mm)
Tire1
T 125/80 R 17 99M
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
!
i
Please compare the recommended tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle with
the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
label located on the spare wheel rim.
Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the Minispare tire differs from
the tire inflation pressure of the road
tires.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs
from the values given in this Operator’s
Manual, inflate the spare wheel tire to
the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the
spare wheel rim.
Make sure the Minispare tire is inflated
to approximately 60 psi (4.1 bar).
476
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model
CLK 350
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/150 A
14 V/150 A
Starter motor
14 V/1.4 KW
14 V/1.7 KW
14 V/1.7 KW
Battery
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP 33
NGK PLKR 6A
Bosch F8 DPP 332
NGK PFR 5R-11
NGK ILFR 6A
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.80 mm)
0.039 in (1.00 mm)
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque
15 - 22 lb-ft (20 - 30 Nm)
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
477
Technical data
Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Model
CLK 350
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length
183.3 in (4657 mm)
183.3 in (4657 mm)
183.3 in (4657 mm)
Overall vehicle width
(exterior rear view mirrors
folded out)
78.4 in (1991 mm)
78.4 in (1991 mm)
78.4 in (1991 mm)
Overall vehicle height
55.6 in (1413 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
Overall vehicle height when
opening/closing soft top
80.2 in (2038 mm)
81.0 in (2057 mm)
80.6 in (2047 mm)
Wheelbase
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front
58.8 in (1493 mm)
58.9 in (1497 mm)
58.9 in (1497 mm)
Track, rear
58.0 in (1474 mm)
58.2 in (1478 mm)
58.2 in (1478 mm)
Weights
Trunk load max.
478
220 lbs (100 kg)
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Model
Capacity
Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter
CLK 350
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
CLK 500
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
CLK 55 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
CLK 350
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
CLK 500
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
CLK 55 AMG 9.3 US qt (8.7 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle
CLK 350
1.16 US qt (1.1 l)
CLK 500
1.69 US qt (1.6 l)
CLK 55 AMG 1.50 US qt (1.4 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Power steering
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
0.64 US qt (0.6 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin
CHF 11S)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
479
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Cooling system
CLK 350
approx. 7.5 US qt (7.1 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
CLK 500
approx. 12.8 US qt (12.0 l) Agent
CLK 55 AMG approx. 12.8 US qt (12.0 l)
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
16.35 US gal (62.0 l)
2.11 US gal (8.0 l)
CLK 350
2.11 US gal (8.0 l)
CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG 2.64 US gal (10.0 l)
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system*
1
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 486).
480
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
!
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at
change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled
oil changes. Failure to do so will result
in engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere.
G
Engine oil additives
Warning!
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the
formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air
conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle's Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. An
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
provide you with additional information.
481
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
!
Premium unleaded gasoline
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow
sparks, flame or smoking materials near
gasoline!
Fuel requirements
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed
of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Only use premium unleaded fuel:
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
482
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label.
Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested
and approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and
may be harmful to the engine operation.
483
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which
provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and
corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective
to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at approx. 266°F (130°C).
484
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet)
are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. -22°F [-30°C]). If you
use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to
approx. -49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat
transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approx. freeze protection
–35°F (–37°C)
–49°F (–45°C)
CLK 350
3.75 US qt (3.55 l)
4.1 US qt (3.9 l)
CLK 500
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
CLK 55 AMG
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
485
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx. 6.4 US qt (6.0 l).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or
concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on
ambient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l]
water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l]
solvent)
486
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Accessory weight
(컄 page 355)
Air pressure
(컄 page 355)
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
Aspect ratio
(컄 page 355)
Bar
(컄 page 355)
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bead
(컄 page 355)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
Cold tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 355)
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and the
navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (CD changer*, telephone, etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.
487
Technical terms
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
Curb weight
(컄 page 355)
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
DOT
(Department Of Transportation)
(컄 page 355)
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
488
FSS (Canada vehicles)
(Flexible Service System)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs the
driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle
speed, engine speed, distance driven
and the time elapsed since your last
maintenance service, and calls for the
next maintenance service accordingly.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 355)
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
(컄 page 355)
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 356)
Technical terms
Head-thorax air bag
Installed in the driver and the front passenger seat, these air bags protect occupants during side impact collisions
exceeding a preset threshold. Unlike
normal side impact air bags,
head-thorax air bags are also designed
to provide protection for the head area.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
coolant temperature indicator and fuel
display.
KEYLESS-GO*
System for entering and operating the
vehicle without the use of a SmartKey.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Kilopascal (kPa)
(컄 page 356)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 356)
Locking knob
Knob on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the locking knob down
on the driver’s or passenger door from
inside will lock that door.
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirror
positions.
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs the
driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. The Maintenance
System in your vehicle tracks distance
driven and the time elapsed since your
last maintenance service, and calls for
the next maintenance service
accordingly.
Maximum load rating
(컄 page 356)
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(컄 page 356)
Menu
The control system displays are arranged in menus. Each menu contains
a number of commands for particular
systems.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
489
Technical terms
MOE
(Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
equipment tires)
Tires with limited run-flat characteristics. The MOExtended system allows
you to continue driving your vehicle
even if there is a total loss of pressure
in one or more tires.
Multifunction display
Display field in the speedometer used
to present information provided by the
control system.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
Normal occupant weight
(컄 page 356)
OCS
(Occupant Classification System)
The system automatically turns the
front passenger front air bag on or off
based on the classified occupant size
category determined by weight sensor
readings from the seat.
490
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all
components used to generate and
transmit motive power to the drive
axles, including
앫
engine
앫
clutch/torque converter
앫
transmission
앫
transfer case
앫
drive shaft
앫
differential
앫
axle shafts/axles
Production options weight
(컄 page 356)
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between regular operation S and
comfort operation C.
CLK 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program:
In addition to S and C (for regular S or
comfort C operation, see above) you
can use the M for manual shift
program.
PSI
(Pounds per Square Inch)
(컄 page 356)
Recommended tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 356)
REST*
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.
Technical terms
Restraint systems
Seat belts, child restraints, lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH).
As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
Rim
(컄 page 356)
Roll bars
Occupant protection system which
consists of tubular steel, integrated in
the rear head restraints. The roll bars
are lowered into the car body during
normal driving conditions and raised
automatically in an accident or in a critical driving situation.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
RFI*
(Run Flat Indicator)
The Run Flat Indicator monitors the set
tire inflation pressures by evaluating
each wheel’s rotational speed. If a
wheel’s rotational speed changes due
to falling tire inflation pressure, a corresponding warning message appears in
the multifunction display.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the gear selector lever from
being inadvertently moved out of
position P without SmartKey turned
and brake pedal depressed.
Sidewall
(컄 page 356)
Soft top
Soft top roof that can be opened by
pulling and closed by pressing a switch
and stored in the soft top compartment
in the trunk area.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Air bags, air bag control unit (with
crash sensor), emergency tensioning
device. Though independent systems,
they are closely interfaced to provide
effective occupant protection.
Steering wheel gearshift control
(CLK 500*, CLK 55 AMG)
You can change the gears yourself with
the steering wheel gearshift buttons.
491
Technical terms
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
TIN
(Tire Identification Number)
(컄 page 357)
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.
Treadwear indicators
(컄 page 357)
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
492
Tire load rating
(컄 page 357)
Tire ply composition and material used
(컄 page 357)
Tire speed rating
(컄 page 357)
Traction
(컄 page 357)
Tread
(컄 page 357)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 357)
Vehicle capacity weight
(컄 page 357)
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
(컄 page 357)
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Wind screen
Screen for deflecting wind from the vehicle interior when the soft top is
lowered.
Index
A
ABS 25, 87, 487
Malfunction indicator lamp 374
Messages in display 385
Accelerator position,
automatic transmission 170
Accessory weight 355
Accident 56
Active head restraints 73
Resetting 434
Air bags 63
Children 64
Front passenger
front air bag off indicator lamp 81
Front, Driver 67
Front, Passenger 67
Head-thorax 68
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 78
Rear side-impact 68
Safety guidlines 66
Air conditioning refrigerant 481
Air conditioning system see
Climate control system
Air conditioning, Cooling 194, 206
Air distribution 190, 200
Air pressure see Tires, Inflation pressure
Air recirculation mode 192, 203
Air vents 195, 208
Air volume 190, 201
Alarm system see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt
(vehicle tool kit) 413, 449, 487
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 484, 485
Antiglare, Rear view mirror 181, 182
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft systems 92
Anti-theft alarm system 92
Immobilizer 92
Tow-away alarm 94
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest 281, 282, 283
Storage box 279
Ashtrays 284
Aspect ratio 355
ATF 326
AUDIO menu 145
Audio system 209
Button and soft key operation 212
CD changer* 229
CD operation 227
Emergency calls "911" 247
Operating and display elements 210
Operating audio system 209
Operating safety 209
Radio operation 217
Sound system* 209, 214
Switching on/off 212
Telephone* operation 209, 233
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirror 182
Automatic central locking,
Control system 117, 159
Automatic climate control see
Climate control system
Automatic headlamp mode see Headlamps
Automatic lighting control,
Interior lighting 134
Automatic locking when driving 117
Automatic shift program 172
493
Index
Automatic transmission 166
Accelerator position 170
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 180
Gear ranges 171
Gear selector lever 48, 166
Gear selector lever position 166, 168
Gear selector lever,
One-touch gearshifting 173
Gear shifting malfunctions 180
Kickdown 170
Manual (One touch) gearshifting 173
Manual shift program 178
One-touch gearshifting, Steering
wheel gearshift control 174
Shift program mode
selector switch 172, 178
Starting engine 48
Transmission fluid level 326
Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF
B
Backrest
Seat, Multicontour*
Seat, Power 38
494
121
Backup lamps
Messages in display 406
Replacing bulbs 438, 439
Bar 355
BAS 88, 487
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 436
Checking battery condition 99
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing 437
Checking battery condition 105
Battery, Vehicle 328, 453
Charging 455
Connecting 455
Disconnecting 454
Installing 455
Jump starting 456
Messages in display 395
Removing 454
Bead 355
Beverage holder see Cup holder
Bi-Xenon headlamps* see Headlamps
Block heater (Canada only) 360
Bolts, Spare wheel 418
Brake Assist System see BAS
Brake fluid 481
Checking 320
Messages in display 396
Brake lamp
Cleaning lenses 369
High mounted 439
Messages in display 404
Replacing bulbs 439, 443
Brake pads
Messages in display 396
Brakes 308
High-performance brake system
(CLK 55 AMG only) 309
Warning lamp 375
Break-in the vehicle 306
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs
C
CAC 487
California retail buyers and lessees,
Important notice for 11
Call priority (Tele Aid) 294
Can holder see Cup holder
CAN system 487
Capacities and
recommended fuels/lubricants 479
Cargo area see Trunk
Index
Carpets, cleaning 371
Catalytic converter 316
CD changer* 227
CD player 146, 227
Center console 27
Lower part 28
Upper part 27
Central locking
Automatic 117, 159
Locking/unlocking from inside 118
Central locking switch 118
Certification label 468
Charcoal filter 204
Children in the vehicle 75
Air bags 64
Blocking rear
side window operation 85
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 81
Infant and
child restraint systems 69, 75
LATCH-type child seat anchors 83
LATCH-type
child seat anchors design A 84
LATCH-type
child seat anchors design B 84
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 78
Cigarette lighter 286
Climate control see
climate control system 186
Climate control system
Air conditioning refrigerant 481
Air conditioning, Cooling 194, 206
Air distribution 190, 200
Air recirculation mode 192, 203
Air vents 195, 208
Air volume 190, 191, 201
Charcoal filter 204
Control panel,
Automatic climate control 197
Control panel, Climate control 187
Deactivating/Reactivating 189, 199
Defogging 202
Defrosting 201
Defrosting, Rear window 185
Front defroster 191
MAXCOOL 202
Residual engine heat
and ventilation* (REST*) 207
REST* 490
Temperature 190, 200
Clock 25, 153, 154
Setting time 153, 154
Cockpit 22, 487
Cockpit Management and Data System
see COMAND*
Cold tire inflation pressure 355
Collapsible wheel chock 413, 416
COMAND* 487
COMAND* see separate
COMAND operating instructions
Combination switch 52, 131
Control system 139, 487
Functions 143
Multifunction display 140
Multifunction steering wheel 140
Resetting to factory default 148
Control system menus 142, 143, 489
AUDIO 145
NAV* 146
Settings 148
Settings, Submenus 149
Standard display 144
Submenus 141
TEL* 163
Trip computer 161
Vehicle status message memory 146
495
Index
Control system submenus 141, 143, 150
Convenience 160
Instrument cluster 151
Lighting 156
Time/Date 153
Vehicle 159
Controller Area Network see CAN system
Coolant 327, 484
Adding 327
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
mixing ratio and quantity 484
Capacities 479
Checking coolant level 327
Messages in display 397–399
Temperature 317
Temperature indicator 137
Warning lamp 377
Coolants 484
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 132
Replacing bulbs 438, 439
Cruise control 265, 488
Canceling 267
Cruise control lever 265
Current speed 266
Fine adjustment 268
Higher speed 268
496
Last stored speed
(“Resume” function) 268
Slower speed 268
Cup holder 283
Curb weight 355
Customer Assistance Center see CAC
D
Date 153
Date, Setting 154, 155
Daytime running lamp mode 129
Setting 156
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging
Windshield 192, 202
Defrosting, Front 191, 201
Defrosting, Rear 185
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 158
Interior lighting 159
Department of Transportation see DOT
Difficulties
With starting 50
Digital speedometer 144
Dimensions, Vehicle 478
Direction of rotation (tires) 333
Displays
Digital speedometer 144
Maintenance service indicator 361
Messages in display 383
Multifunction display 140
Outside temperature 138
Symbol messages 395–412
Text messages 385–393
Vehicle status message memory 147
Vehicle status messages see
Multifunction display messages
Distance to empty (Range),
Trip computer 161
Door
Control panel 30
Entry lamps 135
Handle 30, 107
Locking/unlocking,
KEYLESS-GO* 33, 60, 103
Locking/unlocking,
SmartKey 32, 60, 98
Messages in display 400
Opening from inside/outside 107
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 295
Unlocking, Mechanical key 419
DOT 355
Index
Drinking and driving 307
Driving
Abroad 315
Hydroplaning 311
In winter 313
Instructions 45, 307
Problems 56
Safety systems 87
Systems 265
Through standing water
Driving off 310
Driving safety systems
ABS 87
BAS 88
ESP® 89
Driving systems
Cruise control 265
Parktronic system*
(Canada only) 269
314
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 42, 160
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electrical outlet 287
Electrical system, Technical data 477
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Emergency call system* 289
Emergency calls
911 calls 247
Tele Aid calls 290, 291
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 180
Emergency operations
Active head restraints, Resetting 434
Center console,
Indicator lamps 381–382
Gear selector lever, Unlocking 422
Instrument cluster,
Indicator lamps 374–380
Remote door unlock 295
Roll bars, Lowering 424
Roll bars, Releasing 423
Soft top, Closing 425–433
Trunk lid, Releasing from inside 115
Trunk lid, Unlocking 420
Unlocking/locking
the vehicle 419, 420
Emergency tensioning device see ETD
Emergency, In case of
Battery,Jump starting 292, 456
First aid kit 413
Flat tire, Changing 446
Fuses 462
Hazard warning flasher 133
Roadside Assistance 12
Towing the vehicle 458
Emission control 316
Emission control information label 468
Emission control vacuum line
routing diagram label 468
Emission system warranties 10
Engine
Belt layout 469
Block heater (Canada only) 360
Break-in recommendations 306
Cleaning 366
Compartment 321
Malfunction indicator lamp 25, 376
Maximum engine speed 470
Messages in display 397
Number 468, 488
Starting 48
Starting difficulties 50
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 49
Starting with SmartKey 49
Technical data 470
Turning off 58
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 59
Turning off with SmartKey 58
497
Index
Engine coolant see Coolant
Engine oil 322, 481
Adding 325, 481
Additives 481
Changing 325, 481
Checking level 320
Checking level (Dipstick) 324
Consumption 322
Filler cap 326
Filler neck 326
Messages in display 323, 401
Viscosity 488
Engine oil level 320, 323
ESP® 25, 89, 488
Messages in display 387–388
Warning lamp 378
ETD 72, 488
Safety guidelines 66
Exterior rear view mirrors 43, 181
Parking position 161, 183
498
F
Filler cap, Engine oil 326
Filler neck, Engine oil 326
First aid kit 413
Flat tire 446
Jacking up the vehicle 447
Lowering the vehicle 451
Minispare wheel 416
Mounting the spare wheel 447
Preparing the vehicle 446
Flexible Service System see FSS
(Canada vehicles)
Floormats* 287
Fluids
Brake fluid 320, 481
Engine coolant 327, 484
Engine oil 322, 481
Transmission fluid 326
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system 329, 486
Fog lamps 131, 439
Messages in display 405
Replacing bulbs 438, 439, 443
Front air bags 67
Front lamps see Headlamps
Front passenger front air bag 63, 67
Messages in display 389–392
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 27, 81, 381
FSS (Canada vehicles) 361, 488
Fuel 319, 479
Additives 483
Automatic transmission fluid 479
Brake fluid 479
Capacities 479
Capacities, Fuel tank 480
Engine coolant 480
Engine oil 479
Filling the tank 318
Fuel display 25
Fuel filler flap and cap 318, 421
Fuel filler flap and cap, Multifunction
display messages 400
Fuel reserve warning lamp 379
Power steering fluid 479
Premium
unleaded gasoline 319, 480, 482
Requirements, Octane rating 482
Technical data 479
Fuel cap
Message in display 376
Index
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 161
Resetting 162
Since last reset 162
Fuel filler flap 318
Locking/unlocking 318
Opening in an emergency 421
Fuel reserve warning lamp 25
Fuel tank
Capacity 480
Filler flap 318
Message in display 403
Fuel, Premium
unleaded gasoline 319, 482
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 479
Fuses 462
Aids for changing fuses 462
Fuse box (main)
in passenger compartment 463
Fuse box in engine compartment 463
Fuse box in trunk 464
Fuse chart 462
Fuse extractor 462
Replacing 462
Spare fuses 462
G
Garage door opener 29, 296
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 355
Gear range 171, 488
Automatic transmission 171
Limiting 171
Shifting into optimal 173
Gear selector lever 28, 48, 166
Cleaning 371
Lock 49
Message in display 393
One-touch gearshifting 173
Position 166, 168
Position indicator 25, 140, 167
Unlocking in an emergency 422
Global locking/unlocking see
Key, SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* 98
Global Positioning System see GPS
Glove box 23, 278
Gloves 413
Good visibility 181
GPS 488
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 355
GVWR 356
H
Halogen headlamp see Headlamps
Hands-free microphone 29
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 371
Hazard warning flasher 133
Head restraints 38, 119
Active head restraints 73
Front seat 119
Power seat, Adjusting 38
Rear seat 119
Rear seat, Lowering 120
Rear seat, Raising 120
Headlamp
cleaning system* 181, 329, 486
Headlamp delayed shut-off see
Delayed shut-off, Exterior lamps
Headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode 128
Bi-Xenon* 441, 487
Cleaning lenses 369
Daytime running lamp mode 129
Halogen 440
High beam see High beam flasher
High beam see High beam headlamps
499
Index
Lamp sensor 405
Locator lighting 129
Low beam see Low beam headlamps
Manual headlamp mode 128
Messages in display 404–408
Night security illumination 129
Replacing bulbs 440, 443
Switch 52, 127
Headliner and shelf below rear window,
Cleaning and care of 371
Head-thorax air bag 68, 489
Heated seats* 122
High beam flasher 52, 131
Replacing bulbs
(Bi-Xenon*) 438, 442
Replacing bulbs
(Halogen) 438, 440
High beam headlamps 52, 131
Indicator lamp 25
Messages in display 405
Replacing bulbs
(Bi-Xenon*) 438, 439
Replacing bulbs
(Halogen) 438, 440
Replacing bulbs for high beam flasher
(Bi-Xenon*) 442
500
Switching on 52, 131
High mounted brake lamp 439
Hood 321
Message in display 403
Horn 23
Hydroplaning 311
I
Identification labels 468
Identification number, Vehicle (VIN) 468
Ignition
with KEYLESS-GO* 36
with SmartKey 34
Immobilizer 92
Indicator lamps see
Lamps, indicator and warning
Infant and child restraint systems see
Children in the vehicle 75
Inflation pressure see
Tires, Inflation pressure
Inside door handle 30, 107
Instrument cluster 24, 136, 489
Cleaning 371
Illumination brightness 136
Lamps in 374–380
Messages in display see
Multifunction display messages
Multifunction display 140
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster,
Illumination brightness
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Interior lighting 134
Delayed shut-off 159
Interior rear view mirror 43, 181
Antiglare position 181
Auto-dimming 182
Interior storage spaces see
Storage compartments
J
Jack 415
Jacking up the vehicle
Jump starting 456
447
Index
K
Key, Mechanical 419
Key, SmartKey 96
Batteries 99, 105
Battery check lamp 98, 104
Changing batteries 436
Factory setting 98, 99
Ignition 34
Locking/unlocking 32, 60, 96
Locking/unlocking, Global setting 98
Locking/unlocking,
Selective setting 98
Loss of 100, 106
Message in display 403, 404
Opening and closing
the power windows 252
Opening and closing the soft top 260
Positions in starter switch 34
Remote control 96
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 100
Starting the engine 49
Turning off the engine 58
Unlocking/opening trunk lid 99
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing batteries 437
KEYLESS-GO* 100, 489
Batteries in SmartKey 105
Battery check lamp, SmartKey 104
Factory setting 103, 105
Ignition 36
Important notes 102
Lock button 60
Locking/unlocking 33, 60, 100
Locking/unlocking,
Global setting 103, 104
Locking/unlocking, Global
with lock button on trunk lid 105
Locking/unlocking,
Selective setting 104
Loss of key 106
Messages in display 403, 404
Remote control 100
Start/stop button 35
Starting the engine 49
Turning off the engine 59
Unlocking/opening trunk lid 106
Kickdown 170, 489
Kilopascal 356
L
Labels 468
Certification 468
Emission control information 468
Vacuum line routing diagram 468
Lamp sensor
Messages in display 405
Lamps, exterior 438
Light sensor 405
Messages in display 404–408
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 25, 374
Battery (SmartKey) 98, 104
Brakes 25, 375
Center console 381–382
CHECK ENGINE 376
Coolant 377
Coolant temperature 25, 137
Distance warning 25
Engine diagnostics 376
Engine malfunction 25, 376
ESP® 25, 378
Fog lamps 130
Front passenger front air bag off 68
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 381
501
Index
Fuel reserve 25, 379
High beam headlamp 25
Instrument cluster 374–380
Low beam headlamp 25
Maintenance service 361
Parktronic system*
warning indicators 271
Roll bar 379
Seat belt telltale 25, 71, 379
Seat belts 379
SRS 25, 63, 380
Turn signals 25
Language, Setting 151
LATCH-type child seat anchors see
Children in the vehicle
License plate lamps
Messages in display 405
Replacing bulbs 439, 443
Light alloy wheels, cleaning 370
Light sensor see Lamp sensor
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
Lighting, Exterior and interior 127
Limp Home Mode 180
Loading
Ski sack* (Canada only) 273
Loading see Vehicle loading
502
Loading the vehicle 333
Locator lighting 129, 157
Lock buttons
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 60, 104
Trunk lid (KEYLESS-GO*) 106
Lock knob 489
Locking 60
Loss of keys 100, 106
Loss of Service and
Warranty Information Booklet 467
Low beam headlamps
Indicator lamp 25
Messages in display 406
Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 438
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 438, 440
Switching on 52
Lubricants 479
Luggage cover 262
Folding back 273
M
Maintenance 12, 361
Calling up service indicator 362
Clearing service indicator 362
FSS (Canada vehicles) 361
Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) 361
Resetting service indicator 363
Service indicator 361
Service term exceeded 362
Maintenance system
(U.S. vehicles) 361, 489
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps
Manual shift program 178
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 202
Maximum load rating, Tires 356
Maximum loaded vehicle weight,
Tire inflation pressure 356
Maximum tire inflation pressure 356
Mechanical key 419
Memory function see Seats, Power
Menus see Control system menus
Microphone, Hands-free 29
Minispare wheel see Spare wheel
Mirrors
Adjusting 43
Antiglare position 181
Auto-dimming 182
Exterior rear view mirrors 43
Parking position 126, 161, 183
Interior rear view mirror 43
MOE see MOExtended
MOE tires see MOExtended system*
Index
MOExtended 490
MOExtended system* 452
MON 319, 489
Motor Octane Number see MON
Multicontour seat* see
Seats, Multicontour*
Multifunction display 140, 490
Changing settings see
Control system menus and
Control system submenus
Displaying gear range 171
Selecting language 151
Symbol messages 395–412
Text messages 385–393
Multifunction display messages 383
ABS 385
Battery 395
Brake fluid 396
Brake lamp 404
Brake pads 396
Check engine 397
Coolant 397–399
Display 400
Doors 400
Engine 397
Engine coolant 397–399
Engine oil 323, 401
ESP® 387, 388
Fog lamps 405
Front passenger
front air bag 389–392
Fuel cap 400
Fuel reserve tank 403
Gear selector lever 393
Headlamps 404–408
Hood 403
Key, SmartKey 403
KEYLESS-GO* 403
Lamp sensor 405
Lamps 404
Lamps, exterior 404–408
License plate lamp 405
Parking brake 396
Parking lamps 406
Roll bars 408
Seat belts 409
Soft top 410
SRS 409
Steering gear oil 410
Tele Aid 409
Telephone* 411
Trunk 412
Turn signals 407
Windshield washer fluid 412
Multifunction
steering wheel 26, 140, 490
Button operation 140
N
Navigation system* 146
See separate
COMAND* operating instructions
Net, Parcel 280
Neutral gear position 168
New vehicle break-in 306
Night security illumination 129
Normal occupant weight 356
Number, vehicle identification (VIN) 468
503
Index
O
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Occupant distribution 356
Occupant safety 62
Active head restraints 73
Air bags 63
Children and air bags 64
Children in the vehicle 75
ETD 72
Fastening the seat belts 45
Front air bags 67
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 81, 381
Head-thorax air bags 68
Infant and child restraint systems 75
LATCH-type child seat anchors 83
OCS 78
Rear side-impact air bags* 68
Roll bars 74
Safety guidelines,
Seat belts, Air bag, ETD 66
Seat belts 45, 69
SRS 62
OCS 78, 490
Self-test 82
Odometer 25
504
Oil level see Engine oil, checking level
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting 173
Operating safety 209
Operating the vehicle
outside the USA or Canada 13
Ornamental moldings, cleaning 368
Outside temperature see Displays
Overdue maintenance service 362
Overhead control panel 29
Overspeed range, Engine 490
P
Paintwork, Cleaning 365
Panic alarm 86
Parcel net
Front passenger footwell 280
Parking 57, 310
On hills 57, 310
Over combustible materials 57, 310
Parking assist* see
Parktronic system* (Canada only)
Parking brake 50, 57
Message in display 396
Warning sounds 51
Parking lamps 127
Message in display 406
Replacing bulbs 438, 439, 441, 442
Parking position
Exterior
rear view mirrors 126, 161, 183
Parktronic system* (Canada only) 269
Cleaning system sensors 369
Malfunction 272
Range of the sensors 270
Switching on/off 272
Warning indicators 271
Warning sounds 271, 272
Parts service 466
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp
Passenger compartment 314
Electrical outlet 287
Interior lighting 134
Interior rear view mirror 43
Main fuse box 463
Parcel net in
front passenger footwell 280
Storage bags,
rear side of the front seats 280
Index
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Pedals 307
Phone see Telephone
Plastic and rubber parts, Cleaning 371
Poly-V-belt drive 490
Layout 469
Positions (Memory function) see
Seats, Power
Power assistance 307
Power seat see Seats, Power
Power train 490
Power washer 365
Power windows 249
Cleaning 370
Convenience closing feature 253
Express opening/closing 251
Opening with soft top switch 254
Operating 249
Rear side windows,
Blocking operation 85
Summer opening feature 252
Synchronizing 251
Practical hints 373
Premium unleaded gasoline 482
Problems
While driving 56
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Production options weight 356
Program mode
Automatic shift program 172
Manual shift program 178
Program mode
selector switch 172, 178, 490
PSI 356
R
Radio
Operation 217
Selecting stations 145
Selecting stations (satellite*) 145
Radio transmitters 315
Range (distance to empty) 163
Reading lamp 29, 135
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear seat ashtray see Ashtrays
Rear seat head restraints see
Head restraints
Rear side windows
Blocking operation 85
Rear side-impact air bags* 68
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 185
Recommended
engine oils and oil filter 481
Recommended
tire inflation pressure 356
Recovery services,
Stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 296
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 481
Refueling 318
Regular checks 320
Reminder, Seat belt see Seat belts, Telltale
Remote control
SmartKey 96, 100
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 100
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 295
Removing
Ski sack* (Canada only) 276
Replacing bulbs 438
Additional turn signals 438, 439
Backup lamps 439, 443
Brake lamps 439, 443
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamps* 438, 439
Fog lamps 438, 439, 443
Headlamp bulbs 440
Headlamps 438
505
Index
High beam flasher
(Bi-Xenon*) 438, 442
High beam flasher
(Halogen) 438, 440
High beam headlamps
(Bi-Xenon*) 438, 441
High beam headlamps
(Halogen) 438, 440
High mounted brake lamp 439
License plate lamps 439, 443
Low beam headlamps
(Bi-Xenon*) 438, 441
Low beam headlamps
(Halogen) 438, 440
Parking lamps 438, 439, 441, 442
Side marker lamps 438
Standing lamps 438, 439, 441, 442
Tail lamps 439, 443
Turn signal lamps 438, 439, 443
Turn signal lamps (Bi-Xenon*) 442
Turn signal lamps (Halogen) 441
Reporting safety defects 18
Research Octane Number see RON
Reset button, In
instrument cluster 25, 136, 148, 149
Residual heat and ventilation* see REST*
506
Residual heat utilization* see REST*
REST* 207, 490
Restraint system see
Children in the vehicle
Restraint system see SRS
Restraint systems 491
Reverse gear position 168
RFI see Run Flat Indicator
Rims 356, 471
Roadside Assistance 12, 292
Roll bar 74, 491
Messages in display 408
Operating manually 423
Warning lamp 379
RON 319, 491
Rubber and plastic parts, Cleaning 371
Run Flat Indicator 491
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 342
S
Safety
Driving safety systems 87
Occupant 62
Reporting defects 18
Safety belts see Seat belts
Satellite radio* 222
Seat belts 69
Automatic comfort-fit feature 72
Children in the vehicle 75
Cleaning 371
ETD 72
Fastening 45
Force limiter 72
Messages in display 409
Proper use of 47, 70
Safety guidelines 66
Telltale 25, 71, 379
Seating capacity 335
Seats, Multicontour* 121
Backrest contour 121
Backrest side bolsters 121
Cushion depth 121
Seats, Power 37, 119
Active head restraints 73
Adjustment 38
Easy entry/exit feature 42
Heating* 122
Memory function 124
Ventilation* 123
Selector lever see Gear selector lever
Self-test
OCS 82
Tele Aid 290
Index
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 467
Service and warranty information 10
Service intervals see
Maintenance, Service indicator
Service life, Tires 331
Service see Maintenance
Service System see
Maintenance service system
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles)
Service, Parts 466
Settings
Control system menus 142
Control system submenus 143
Date 154, 155
Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 103
Factory, SmartKey 98
Global, KEYLESS-GO* 103
Global, SmartKey 98
Individual vehicle 148
Memory function 124
Menus and submenus 141
Resetting all, Control system 148
Selective, KEYLESS-GO* 104
Selective, SmartKey 98
Time 153, 154
Shelf below rear window, Cleaning 371
Shift lever position indicator 167
Shift lock 491
Shift program mode 172, 178
Shifting
Gear selector lever 48, 166
Gear selector lever positions 168
Shifting,
Automatic transmission 51, 166
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses 369
Messages in display 407
Replacing bulbs 438, 439
Side windows see Power windows
Sidewall 356
Ski sack* (Canada only) 273
Removing 276
Ski sack roller blind 273, 276
Unfolding and loading 273
Unloading and folding 275
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey 96
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* see
KEYLESS-GO*
Snow chains 360
Snow tires 359
Soft top 255, 491
Cleaning 367
Emergency operations 425–433
Locking after raising/lowering 259
Luggage cover 262
Messages in display 410
Opening/closing 255
Opening/closing,
SmartKey 260, 261
Opening/closing,
Soft top switch 256, 257
Wind screen 263
Soft top switch 254, 256
Sound system* 209, 214
Spare fuses 413, 462
Spare parts service see Parts service
Spare wheel 416
Bolts 413, 418
Mounting 447
Sizes 476
Speedometer 25, 151
SRS 63, 70, 491
Indicator lamp 25, 63, 380
Message in display 409
Standard display, Selecting display 152
507
Index
Standing lamps 127
Replacing bulbs 438, 439, 441, 442
Standing water, Driving through 314
Starter switch 23, 34
Positions 34
Starting difficulties, Engine 50
Starting, Engine 48
Status line, Selecting display 152
Steering column 41
Steering gear oil
Message in display 410
Steering wheel 41
Buttons 26
Cleaning 371
Gearshift buttons 175, 176
Gearshift control 175, 176
One-touch gearshifting 174
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 296
Storage compartments 278
Armrest, Front 281, 282
Armrest, Rear 283
Cup holder 283
Glove box 278
Parcel net 280
Storage bags 280
Storage box 279
508
Storing
Tires 332
Submenus see
Control system submenus 141
Sun visors 184
Supplemental Restraint System see SRS
Switching off
Parktronic system* 272
Switching on
Parktronic system* 272
Symbols used in
this operator’s manual 15
T
Tachometer 25, 138
Overspeed range 138
Tail lamps
Cleaning lenses 369
Messages in display 407
Replacing bulbs 439, 443
Tar stains 365
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant 481
Brake fluid 481
Capacities fuels,
coolants, lubricants etc. 479, 480
Coolant 480, 484
Electrical system 477
Engine 470
Engine oil 481
Engine oil additives 481
Fuel capacity 480
Fuel requirements 482
Gasoline additives 483
Lubricants 479
Premium unleaded gasoline 482
Rims and tires 471
Tires, Mixed size 475
Tires, Same size 473
Tires, Spare wheel sizes 476
Vehicle dimensions 478
Weights 478
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system 480, 486
Tele Aid 29, 289, 492
Call priority 294
Emergency calls 290
Hands-free microphone 29
Information 293
Initiating an
emergency call manually 291
Messages in display 409
Remote door unlock 295
Index
Roadside Assistance 292
SOS button 291
Stolen Vehicle
Recovery services 296
System self-check 290
Tele Aid System 289
Telematics* 492
Telephone* 26, 163, 288
Answering/ending a call 164
Hands-free microphone 29
Messages in display 411
Operation 163, 233
Phone book* 164
Redialing 165
TEL menu* 163
Temperature
Interior temperature 190, 200
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 451, 492
Time 153
Time, Setting 153, 154
TIN 357
Tire and Loading Information
Placard 334
Terminology 355
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 339
Tire inflation pressure see
the placard on the fuel filler flap
Tires 330, 471
Air pressure 355
Care and maintenance 331
Chains 360
Cleaning 332
Direction of rotation, Spinning 333
Driving instructions 311
Important notes,
Tire inflation pressure 340
Inflation pressure 320, 339, 341
Inflation pressure,
Information placard 339
Inspection 331
Load rating 357
MOExtended system* 452
Ply composition
and material used 357
Problems under-/overinflated 344
Retreads 330
Rims and tires 471
Rotation 358
Run Flat Indicator 342
Service life 331
Sizes 473
Snow 359
Spare wheel 416, 447, 476
Speed rating 312, 348, 357
Storing 332
Temperature 354
Terminology 355
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Traction 312, 357
Tread 357
Tread depth 332, 359
Treadwear indicators 357
Wear pattern 358
Winter 359
Tools 413
Tow-away alarm 27, 94
Towing eye bolt 460
CLK 500, CLK 55 AMG 461
Towing the vehicle 458
Traction 312, 357
Transmission gear selector lever see
Gear selector lever
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Traveling abroad 315
Tread 357
Tread depth 332, 359
Treadwear indicators 357
509
Index
Trip computer 161
Trip odometer 137
Trunk
Closing from inside 110
Fuse box 464
Lamp 135
Lid 108
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 106
Luggage cover 262
Message in display 412
Opening 108
Opening from inside 109
Trunk lid 110
Trunk lid emergency release 115
Unlocking in an emergency 420
Unlocking/opening,
KEYLESS-GO* 106
Unlocking/opening,
SmartKey 99
Valet locking 116
Turn signal lamps
Cleaning lenses 369
Messages in display 407
Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 442
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 441
Replacing bulbs (rear) 443
510
Turn signals 53
Additional in mirrors 438
Bulbs 438, 439
Bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 442
Bulbs (Halogen) 441
Bulbs (rear) 443
Cleaning lenses 369
Indicator lamps 25
Turning off engine 58
U
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards 357
Units, Settings
Speedometer 151
Unleaded gasoline, Premium
Upholstery, Cleaning 372
Useful features 278
482
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label 468
Vehicle
Battery 328, 453
Break-in the vehicle 306
Care 364
Control system, Settings menu 148
Dimensions 478
Jump starting 456
Locking/unlocking,
KEYLESS-GO* 33, 60, 100
Locking/unlocking,
SmartKey 32, 60, 96
Lowering 451
Modifications and alterations,
Operating safety 16
Towing 458
Unlocking/locking
in an emergency 419, 420
Washing 366
Weights 478
Vehicle capacity weight 357
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle jack 415, 448
Vehicle lighting 127, 320
Index
Vehicle loading
Instructions 277, 333
Load limit 333
Terminology 355
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 357
Vehicle recovery services,
Stolen (Tele Aid) 296
Vehicle status message memory 146
Vehicle status messages 383
Vehicle system settings,
Control system 139
Vehicle tool kit 413
Vehicle washing 366
VIN 468, 492
W
Warning indicators
Parktronic system*
(Canada only) 271
Warning sounds
Parking brake 51
Parktronic system*
(Canada only) 271, 272
Seat belt telltale 71
Warranty coverage 10, 467
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washer reservoir level 480
Washing the vehicle 366
Wear pattern, Tires 358
Weights, Vehicle 478
Wheel
Bolts 418
Change 447
Collapsible wheel chock 416
Removing 449
Spare 416
Tightening torque 451
Wrench 448
Wheels, Sizes 473
Wheels, Tires and 330
Wind screen 263, 492
Windows see Power windows
Windshield
Cleaning 55, 370
Defogging 192, 202
Windshield washer fluid 329, 486
Message in display 412
Mixing ratio 486
Refilling 329
Reservoir level 480
Wiping 55
Windshield washer system 480, 486
Windshield wipers 53
Cleaning wiper blades 370
Replacing wiper blades 444
Winter driving 359
Block heater (Canada only) 360
Snow chains 360
Tires 359
Winter driving instructions 313
Winter tires 359
Wood trims, cleaning 372
X
Xenon headlamps* see Headlamps
511
512
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-3057-31
Press time May 27, 2005
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany